JP2022010703A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a group performance more suitably.SOLUTION: By designing a second display period progressed by allowing characters to appear one after another so as to be longer than a first display period until character display is completed first after character display is started first, a suitable group notice performance can be provided. In a group notice performance, a doubt regarding whether a performance is a group notice performance or a misunderstanding that only one person appears can be prevented since there are no situations in which only one person is displayed. Storage means can store display position displacement information for displacing a display position in a display area of at least a partial specific image from a first position to a second position differing from the first position, and image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which a specific image disposed in a specific display layer on the basis of image data is displaced based on display position displacement information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 49

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that executes a group effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine capable of performing a group effect in which images of a plurality of curactors and objects appear.

JP-A-2019-050851

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to enjoy the game by executing the group production, but there is still room for improvement in such a group production.

The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of more preferably performing group production.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 47 and 84),
Moreover,
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 173-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 173-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 173-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, according to such a configuration, the group effect can be more preferably executed. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 1. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a splattering effect (specific effect). However, in such a game machine, since the effect is simply that the image is broken and scattered, the effect is improved by executing the effect in the state where other images are displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, it is necessary to create dedicated image data for each image displayed on the image display device in order to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means is large. There is a problem that the image may become excessively large, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific effect.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 173-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 173-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 173-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the frame lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device. It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of a screen in an image display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating various boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the hit type. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an effect control command. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the prevariation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the post-variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating the prevariation pattern determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table in each notice production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening post-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of group notice execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a group notice work process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of this video production process. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the 6-person group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the auxiliary display used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the motion blur processing used in a group notice production. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the contour when characters overlap in a group notice effect. It is the figure which looked into between the game board and an image display device during execution of a group notice production. It is a figure which shows the whole picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the change of volume and the luminance data table in a group notice effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a group notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a group notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a reach line luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a parent table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an accessory lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a panel left lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a background notice brightness data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a background notice luminance data table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of all lighting. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the luminance data table at the time of a PUSH effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a child table in a group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group notice luminance data table which concerns on a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example in the case where the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the background notice is executed in the stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when a lamp notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the first half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in the latter half of SP reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode in a final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode in a stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. 3 is for explaining the production mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in the stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the details of a boingo group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the production mode of the comparative example when the boingo group notice is executed in a stage A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the boingo group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the dog group notice which concerns on a modification is executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the 6-person group notice and the dog group notice. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect mode when the group notice effect is executed in the reach line. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a time saving loss. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example in an effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a layer. It is explanatory drawing of the generation of the displacement image when the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the application example of the displacement image to the displacement target image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table 1. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display image processing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the generated image and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a time-saving state. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the development suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the reach suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the revival effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the resurrection effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the crack effect image in the revival effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the look-ahead notice effect in a modification. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the look-ahead notice effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the promotion effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image generated in the modification, and the area which can be displayed by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the promotion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the temporary stop notification effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image generated in the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the display of the stereoscopic image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the notice effect during variable display and the development suggestion effect in a modification. It is explanatory drawing when this invention is applied to the slot machine in the modification.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machines, etc.]
1 and 2 are front views of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 and 2 show an arrangement layout of main members in a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by variably displaying a special symbol. The "variable display" of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

Two types of special symbols are provided as the special symbols that are variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also referred to as "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. Update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character named Yumemu-chan, who appears in the production performed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yumemu-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko machine 1. Further, on the lower right game board 2 of the image display device 5, a character named Jam-chan, which appears in the production executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Yumemu-chan is the main character, it is the most important of all the characters, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters including Jam-chan. In addition, Jam is the most important character other than Yumemu-chan, who is the main character, and appears more frequently (number of times) in the production than other characters other than Yumemu-chan. In addition, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yumemu-chan and Jam-chan, is a character that appears first in the scene where a character is selected, a character that is placed in the most prominent position, or a character that is fully selected. It may be the character located at the highest rank among them.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 8). The variable-sweep wing device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the second start winning opening is used. It becomes a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as a closed state in which the second start winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 8), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (see FIG. 8). Hereinafter, it is usually referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A includes a gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 3) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning opening door is provided in the space between the pachinko machines, and this large winning opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open and close the normal large winning opening with a gaming ball. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 8), the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the normal large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 8), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as V large). Form a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the route to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 24 (see FIG. 8) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. By detecting the game ball by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to the probable change state. That is, in the present embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol is performed. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. The movable body 32 is configured such that the member with the letters "POWERFUL" is located on the front side of the member with the letters "2". As a result, the characters "POWERFUL2" are formed. "POWERFUL2" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation or the name of a singer). In addition, the characters attached to the movable body 32 are the names of the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character with the next highest priority after the main character (for example, "dream" indicating the main character Yume-chan. You may show a dream "). In the present embodiment, the model name (powerful 2) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown on the movable body 32.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 1 and a position overlying the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. .. Specifically, in the movable body 32, among the members with the letters "POWERFUL" and the members with the letters "2", only the members with the letters "POWERFUL" are shown in FIG. By falling from the position shown in FIG. 2, the image is stopped at a position covering the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The movable body 32 is also referred to as an accessory.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or pressed) by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 8).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 8).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a special LED board 20 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved storage number, the second reserved storage number, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the special figure LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special figure) in the first special figure game and the special symbol in the second special figure game can be obtained by combining lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 5A, which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 22 of the special figure 2.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are combined by the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 5B, which will be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 53 of FIG. The type of the first special figure is represented, and the type of the second special figure is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the variable display unit 54 of the special figure 2.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a board provided above the game board 2. The lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, the V attacker lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V large winning opening are opened to win the V prize. A V lamp 9G that notifies that a round of possible jackpot gaming states is in progress and a V prize has occurred, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, and a stick controller 31A. The stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, the frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and the frame right provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is equipped with a lamp 9R. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the letter "POWERFUL" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the accessory lamp 9A1 is behind the "P" and "O" portions, and the accessory lamp 9A2 is. The accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "W" and "E" parts, the accessory lamps 9A3 are arranged on the back side of the "R" and "F" parts, and the accessory lamps 9A4 are arranged on the back side of the "U" and "L" parts. There is. As a result, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the member with the letters "POWERFUL", so that the "POWERFUL" is lit (light-emitting).

The panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, the main character (for example, "dream dream" indicating the main character Yumemu-chan) is drawn in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are the main characters. Is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the left side lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

As shown in FIG. 2, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. On the upper side of the game board 2, the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, respectively, divided into three areas, left, middle, and right. Has been done. The part of the game board 2 provided with the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and the on-board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 is formed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, whereby the on-board lamps are formed. When 9C1 to 9C13 are lit (light-emitting) on the back side of the upper portion of the game board 2, the upper portion of the game board 2 is lit (light-emitting) in white or red.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V attacker lamp 9F lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A lights up (lights up).

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 marked with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It has become. The electric chew lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (light emitting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (light emitting).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and by lighting (light emitting), the stick controller 31A is lit (light emitting). The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and by lighting (light emitting), the push button 31B is lit (light emitting).

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 4) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The left side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 4) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and each lamp is lit (light emitting) for the gaming machine. The right side of the frame 3 is lit (light-emitting). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a frame lamp. In addition, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chew lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the frame left lamp 9L, And the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 8).

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 8) is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has 12 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 in a counterclockwise direction from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has 11 lamp groups of the frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12 clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R emits light near the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the special figure LED substrate 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. 5A, the special figure LED board 20 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 21 showing a variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable display unit showing a variable display of the second special figure. 22, a special figure 1 storage display unit 23 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 storage display unit 24 showing a second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. , The normal figure storage display unit 25 showing the number of reserved normal figures, the normal figure display unit 26 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, the right-handed display unit 30 for urging the player to hit right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. A probability variation display unit 28 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, a time reduction display unit 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 27 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit are provided. Each display unit may notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special figures or ordinary symbols, the result, the current gaming state, the number of pending numbers, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 displays a stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED board 20 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 30. In the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 30 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 30, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , The right-handed display / off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 30 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 30 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 30.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path that passes through the left region of the gaming area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A is present ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big winning opening) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path toward the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 30 urges the player to make a right-handed hit. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls is paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by inserting a game ball into a normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player can make a right-handed hit while the display prompting the right-handed hit is made. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probable change state. For this reason, the player may have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 5B, the fourth symbol unit 50 has a special figure 1 storage display unit 51 indicating a first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure game corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 52 showing the number of reserved storage, special figure 1 variable display unit 53 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. A special figure 2 variable display unit 54 showing the above, and a right-handed display unit 55 that urges the player to hit right-handed are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the second special figure game and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

In the following, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol indicates that the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 1 variable display unit 53. Also called. Further, the fact that the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol is represented by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the variation display (variable display) of the second special symbol. Refer to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 55 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the symbol changes due to the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After confirmation, the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 55 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 6 is a view looking through between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized. ..

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays an image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern or a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is used. Etc.) are variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, the first hold storage display area 5D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays A displayable second hold storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the special symbol and the fourth symbol 5J indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are displayed. At the left end of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol 5M having a size smaller than that of each decorative symbol is displayed. The small symbols are displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L, the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 5M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 7, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 5M has a size smaller than the decorative symbol at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5. Have been placed. Therefore, the legibility of the small symbol 5M is lower than the legibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is a quadrangle or a substantially quadrangle, but as described above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. It is fixed so as to cover it. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, a part (particularly the end) of the screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized or is difficult to be visually recognized by the gaming board 2. It has become.

[Board configuration]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 connected to the power supply switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special figure LED board 20 and the like, solenoid drive signals). Consists of including.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), a count switch 23, a V winning switch 24) for detecting a game ball. A detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on, etc.) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) assigns an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be turned on (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-described configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special drawing game by the special drawing 1 variable display unit 21 of the special drawing LED board 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special drawing game by the special drawing 2 variable display unit 22 of the special drawing LED board 20 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (starting prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, which will be described later). The actual design differs depending on the type of big hit.) When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to) is used, it becomes a "big hit". It should be noted that the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20. Is also referred to as a "specific display result". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol. ) Corresponds to the combination of lighting modes, it becomes a "small hit". Further, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol. When the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the symbol) is used, it becomes "missing". It should be noted that, in the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20, a special symbol (loss) different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is used. The lighting mode corresponding to the symbol) is also referred to as a “loss display result”.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state. In addition, it is not always necessary to provide a small hit as a hit type.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until early timing. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as the opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type that can hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state for some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, and a probability change state, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, it is not necessary that there is no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9, and the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be turned off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach, super reach with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, and strongest reach with higher jackpot reliability than super reach. Also, in Super Reach, it is divided into the first half of Super Reach and the second half of Super Reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the normal reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the first half of the super reach. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the variable display display result is derived with the strongest reach than when the variable display display result is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is also referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is also referred to as "first half of SP", and "second half of super reach" is also referred to as "second half of SP".

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (the above-mentioned specific display result), it is predetermined as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol that is a combination of big hits is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "small hit", a predetermined small hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. A definite decorative symbol (for example, "1 3 5") is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "small hit"). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit" of some big hit types (a big hit type of a big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes a "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "loss" (the above-mentioned loss display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, but the variable display of the decorative symbol. As a display result of, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "non-reach loss") of the non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a big hit combination. The confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the current state is in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

[Various tables related to big hits]
Various tables related to big hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

(Hit type)
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a hit type. As shown in FIG. 9, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 3 rounds. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of three rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 1, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 6 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 6, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variation jackpot 7 is a jackpot controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 7 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot 7, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probabilistic jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpots 8 and 9, such a high accuracy high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(Each random number)
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 10, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to its upper limit of 65536, and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for determining the post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns. Post-variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation in the special symbol. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss. For example, it is updated one by one, added and updated from 1, and added and updated up to the upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Will be updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit. For example, it is added and updated from 1 to 1 and is added and updated up to its upper limit of 239, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the pre-variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a pre-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns. The pre-variation refers to the variation of the first half of the variation of the special symbol. Random 5 is, for example, incremented and updated by 1 from 1 and incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 251 and then incremented and updated from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 6 is, for example, incremented and updated from 1 to 1, incremented and updated up to the upper limit of 201, and then incremented and updated from 1 again.

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) whether or not the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Then, which of the plurality of types of jackpots is to be selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 2.

First, the posterior variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random number for determining the posterior variation pattern (random 3 and 4), and the anterior variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the anterior variation pattern (random 5). Will be done. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change time) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

The jackpot judgment values are set for the number of judgment values shown in the upper column of FIG. 11 (a) in the normal jackpot determination table, and the lower column of FIG. 11 (a) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. The jackpot judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time, and the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the probability change is added to the normal time. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the probabilistic state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). If it matches the jackpot determination value, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 11A shows the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit or the probability (ratio) of becoming a loss.

11 (b) and 11 (c) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11B is a first special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when the big hit is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 11C is a second special figure big hit type determination table used for determining the big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11B, the numerical values are compared with the random 2 values for jackpot type determination, and correspond to the normal jackpots 1 and 2 and the probability variation jackpots 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of determined judgment values. For example, as shown in FIG. 11B, for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is 100 random 2s. 25 of the random 2 values are assigned, the probability variation jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 5 random 2 out of 100 random 2 and the probability variation jackpot 2 is 37 of the 100 random 2 Random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 4 is 4 random 2 out of 100 random 2s. The value of is assigned.

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11C, determination values are set for the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 2. Has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 11 (c), for the second special figure, the probability variation jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variation jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2s. 5 random 2 values are assigned, probabilistic jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probabilistic jackpot 8 is 70 out of 100 random 2s. The value of each random 2 is assigned, and the probability variation jackpot 9 is assigned the value of 10 random 2 out of 100 random 2.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 2 values match as the jackpot type, and the random 2 values match as the jackpot symbol. Determine the big hit design. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

[Direction control command]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 which is the control board on the main side transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 12 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (pre-variation pattern) corresponding to the pre-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of pre-variation patterns, there is a pre-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the pre-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the posterior variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. It is a command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability variation jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability variation jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 2 is determined. The command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability variation jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability variation jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 5 is determined. The command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability variation jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability variation jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability variation jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability variation jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that the probability variation jackpot 9 is determined. Each of the loss designation command, the normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 9 designation command, or these are collectively referred to as an 8C system command.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command that specifies the initialization (designates to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probabilistic state specification command for designating the background of the probabilistic state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probabilistic state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95-series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that normally specifies the start of the jackpot 2. The command A003 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 1. The command A004 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 4 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 2. The command A005 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 4. The command A007 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 7 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 5. The command A008 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 8 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 6. The command A009 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 9 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 7. The command A010 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 8. The command A011 (H) is a probabilistic jackpot start 11 designation command that designates the start of the probabilistic jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closure of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big winning opening is also called an A2 system command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that normally specifies the end of jackpot 2. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 1. The command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 2. The command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 3. The command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 4. The command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 5. The command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 6. The command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 7. The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 8. The command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command for designating the end of the probability variation jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designated commands, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command for designating that a V prize has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

The command B100 (H) is a first start winning prize designation command for designating that there was a first start winning prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the jackpot determination, the jackpot type determination, and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and a determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type are in the range of the determination value at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to send the data to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[Variation pattern]
The contents of the fluctuation pattern, determination of the fluctuation pattern, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 19.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main side. Each variation pattern is managed by the main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern corresponding to the post-variation. It is designed to include. The pre-variation pattern corresponds to the pre-variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 12, and the post-variation pattern corresponds to the post-variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. Corresponds to.

(Pre-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pre-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Is. The pre-variation number 2 is a pre-variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative symbol over 3 seconds).

The pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ×) (a reach in which the movable body 32 does not operate in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (accessory ○) (reach in which the movable body 32 operates in the reach mode). The pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (reach that becomes a reach mode and develops into a final reach).

The pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after one pseudo-variation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative symbol until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Variable display (variable display). The effect of repeating such pseudo-variations is also called pseudo-ream. By executing the pseudo-ream, the variable display based on one hold memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The variable display that is temporarily stopped and then restarted is also referred to as "re-variable display". The pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after one pseudo-variation. The pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

The pre-variation number 10 is a pre-variation pattern command (8009 (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (accessory ×) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A (H)) that specifies that the normal reach (role ○) is executed after performing the pseudo-variation twice. The pre-variation number 12 is a pre-variation pattern command (800B (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo-variation twice.

A variation time is specified for each of the pre-variation patterns, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting the moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 7 to 9, 41500 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1246. Further, in the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, 62000 mse is set as the variation time, and the number of frames is about 1861.

(Post-variation pattern on the main side)
FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of posterior variation patterns to which the posterior variation numbers are assigned, the posterior variation number 1 is a posterior variation pattern command (8400 (H)) for designating a 13-second variation. The post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401 (H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. The post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402 (H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. The post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403 (H)) that specifies that the pseudo-continuous gassing is executed. Pseudo-ren Gase is an effect that pretends to execute pseudo-ren and does not execute pseudo-ren in the end.

The post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative pattern that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach). The post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the latter half of SP (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (variation of a decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode and becomes a hit mode). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that specifies the first half (hit) of the SP (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes the hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A (H)) that specifies the latter half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B (H)) that specifies the final reach (hit) (the variation of the decorative symbol that develops into the final reach and becomes the hit mode in the final reach).

(Judgment of post-variation pattern)
The post-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters in the jackpot determination depending on whether it is determined to be a jackpot or a loss. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of loss. As shown in FIG. 15, when a loss is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 3 described with reference to FIG. Further, when the jackpot determination is determined to be a loss, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved storages after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the number of reserved storages after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined as the post-variation pattern. A different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 1, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of reserved storages after digestion is 3, one of the post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

In this way, the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion, and further, the post-variation number is determined using a different number of determination values according to the number of reserved memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of fluctuation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, which makes it possible to give variety to the game and improve the fun of the game.

FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of a big hit. As shown in FIG. 16, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described with reference to FIG. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different numbers of determination values according to the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, when it is determined to be one of the normal jackpot 1, 2 and the probabilistic jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8, any of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12. The posterior variation pattern is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When it is determined to be one of the probabilistic jackpots 3 and 9, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. .. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

When the probability variation jackpot 4 is determined, any of the posterior variation patterns 9 to 12 is determined, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be any of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1 / 1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of variation pattern changes according to the type of jackpot, thereby giving diversity to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach is about 1/102 at the time of loss, whereas it is a big hit. Since the time is about 1 / 1.1, which is higher than that, when the SP reach or the final reach is developed, the player can be expected to have a big hit.

(Judgment of pre-variation pattern)
FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a pre-variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined. Further, the pre-variation number determined is also different depending on the type of the post-variation pattern determined earlier.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 1 is determined, the posterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17B, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 2 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17C, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 3 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 17D, when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 4 is determined, the anterior variation pattern of the anterior variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 17 (e), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 5 and 9, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4 and 7. As shown in FIG. 17 (f), when it is determined to be the posterior variation pattern of any of the posterior variation numbers 6 and 10, it is determined to be any of the anterior variation patterns of the anterior variation numbers 4, 7 and 10. As shown in FIG. 17 (g), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 7 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation number 5.

As shown in FIG. 17 (h), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 11 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 5, 8 and 11 of the anterior variation number 5. As shown in FIG. 17 (i), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 8 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9 and 12 of the anterior variation number 6. As shown in FIG. 17 (j), when the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation number 12 is determined, it is determined to be one of the anterior variation patterns 6, 9, and 12.

(Total variation pattern)
FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, any of the variation patterns of the main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 18 is obtained.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total variation pattern on the sub side. Further, on the sub side as well, the fluctuation patterns of the sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each notice production]
FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table in each notice effect. In the present embodiment, a notice effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol may be executed. The notice effect is also an effect that suggests or foretells the occurrence of a big hit, and is also an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. The advance notice effect includes a group advance notice effect (also referred to as a group advance notice or a group effect) and an SP first half title advance notice effect (also referred to as an SP first half title advance notice).

The group notice effect is an effect of displaying an image in which a plurality of objects progress as a group. Multiple objects include any moving object, such as a character such as a person, fish or animal, or a machine such as an airplane or car. The object such as a character may be of one type or may be of a plurality of types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of group notice effects are provided. Specifically, a 6-person group notice in which 6 characters dressed as maids progress in a group, a Baku Chu group notice in which a mouse character with a bomb body named Baku Chu progresses in a group, A Boingo group notice can be executed in which a character named Boingo progresses as a group.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the group notice effect is executed by the group notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8, 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. Or, the type of group notice effect to be performed is determined.

FIG. 20A shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage A. In the present embodiment, even if variable display is performed based on the same fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of stages having different production modes (background image, BGM, sound effect, appearing character, etc.) are provided. .. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage A is a stage in which a character named Yumemu-chan, which is included in the six characters dressed as maids, is directed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 15%, and 6 of them have a probability of 13%. It will be decided as a group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 85%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 55%, and 30%. It is decided to announce the Boingo group with the probability of.

Here, considering that the probability of losing is about 319/320 and the probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern of post-variation numbers 6 to 8 is about 1/102, the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss The probability of being determined by the post-variation pattern is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 15%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of becoming a big hit is about 1/320 and the probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is about 1 / 1.1, the variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. The probability of being determined by the posterior variation pattern is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 85%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.27%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

FIG. 20B shows a lottery table for executing a group notice lottery in stage B. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the stage B is a stage in which a character called Baku Chu is performed.

As shown in FIG. 20 (b), when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 10%, and the explosion is performed with a probability of 8%. It will be decided as a Chu group notice, and there is a 2% chance that it will be decided as a Boingo group notice. In addition, when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to the hit is determined, the group notice effect is executed with a probability of 90%, and among them, the group notice effect is determined with a probability of 60%, and 30 It is decided to be a Boingo group notice with a probability of%.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 10%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of loss is about 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group notice will be executed is about 90%, so that the probability that the group notice will be executed at the time of hitting is about 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the group notice is executed is about 74%. The reliability (expectation) of the group notice is not limited to 74%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

The SP first half title notice is an effect suggesting that when the SP reach is developed, it will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the character image showing the title of the first half of the SP reach. In the present embodiment, the display of the character image of the SP first half title is executed in both the stage A and the stage B, but the advance notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the SP first half title is the case of the stage B. Is only executed. Even in the case of stage A, a notice effect for changing the display mode of the character image of the title in the first half of the SP may be executed.

In the present embodiment, whether or not the SP first half title notice is executed by the SP first half title notice lottery when the post-variation pattern of the post-variation numbers 6 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach is determined. , And the type of SP first half title notice to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 20 (c), when the posterior variation number 6 to 8 corresponding to the loss is determined, the SP first half title notice is executed with a probability of 20%, and the posterior variation number corresponding to the hit. If the fluctuation pattern is determined after 10 to 12, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title notice will be executed.

Here, as described above, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of the variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss is about 1/102. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 20%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of loss is about 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability of being determined to be the post-variation pattern of variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hit is about 1/320. In this case, since the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed is about 80%, the probability that the SP first half title notice is executed at the time of hitting is about 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a big hit when the SP first half title notice is executed is about 56%. The reliability (expectation) of the title notice in the first half of the SP is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be expected that the player will be hit by a big hit.

In this way, the reliability (expectation of big hit) in the group notice is 64% (in the case of stage A) and 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability in the SP first half title notice (in the case of big hit). Expectation) is 56%, and the group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice. Therefore, when the group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the SP first half title notice is executed, and the player is executed the group notice rather than the SP first half title notice. I have come to expect.

In addition, the boingo group notice in stage A is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed, it is executed. , Almost likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit, so even if the 6-person group notice is executed, it is lost. The probability of being is greater than the Boingo group notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the 6-person group notice. I have come to expect.

Similarly, the boingo group notice in stage B is executed only with a probability of 2% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 30% at the time of hit, so when the boingo group notice is executed. Is likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu group notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit, so the Baku Chu group notice is executed. The possibility of losing is greater than the Baku Chu Mondai notice. Therefore, when the Boingo group notice is executed, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the Baku Chu group notice is executed, and the player is executed the Boingo group notice rather than the Baku Chu group notice. I have come to expect that.

Furthermore, the 6-person group notice in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% at the time of loss, whereas it is executed with a probability of 55% at the time of hit. On the other hand, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% at the time of loss, and is executed with a probability of 60% at the time of hit. For this reason, the Baku Chu Mondai notice in stage B is executed at a higher rate than the 6-person group notice in stage A at the time of a big hit. As a result, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed in stage B, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the 6-person group notice is executed in stage A, and the player has 6 more than the 6-person group notice. We are now expecting the crowd announcement to be carried out.

The reliability of the group notice in the stage A and the reliability of the group notice in the stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, both the group notice in stage A and the group notice in stage B need to be more reliable than the SP first half title notice, and the boingo group notice is higher than the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice. It suffices if the reliability is high.

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 makes necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the gaming control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the recovery process (step S4) and then the setting confirmation process (step S5). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the game is stopped, which is different from the lost symbol. It suffices to control so that the display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like. Turn off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, a pressing operation of the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. The setting change process of step S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. .. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted. (Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 starts the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined information output process. Data such as information (information indicating the number of start winnings and the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state has been reached) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal map game is performed by driving the normal map display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal maps is displayed by turning on the normal map storage display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 22. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 22 being executed after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special diagram 2 variable display unit 22 stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the rate at which the gaming ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). If the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Starting prize judgment process)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 23. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (Step S51). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S52 (Y in step S52). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step). S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, it is determined whether or not it is "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing any of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step S58). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 uses the random number value random 1 for jackpot determination and the jackpot type determination among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value random 2 and the random number value random 3 and 4 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random values 1 to 4 are stored in the first special figure holding storage unit (not shown), while the starting buffer value is "2". At a certain time, numerical data indicating random values 1 to 4 are stored in a second special figure holding storage unit (not shown).

For the numerical data indicating the random value random 1 for determining the jackpot and the random value random 2 for determining the jackpot type, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result is "". It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". Random random values 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step S59, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for sending the first start winning prize designation command is made to. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start prize designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is seconded. 2 Make settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start prize designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 22 after the special symbol process process is completed. To.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the hold storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start opening buffer, initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information (step S1001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step S1002). If a predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area is "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step S1004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating "second" (that is, the data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (first). 1 Set the data indicating "first" in the flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer or the data indicating "second" is set. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is the second. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and determines each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or). The order of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command of the side indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step S1009). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining that a jackpot is determined if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability changing state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, when the number of jackpot determination values is probable, the jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical values in the lower column of FIG. 11A) are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values is probable. A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 11A) are set to be less than the jackpot determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in a state or a time-saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation as to whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the gaming state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) and the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier of the conditions is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 11 (b) and the second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. 11 (c) are used. Select one of the judgment tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11B. Further, the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11C when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the jackpot type extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and stores the random number for determining the jackpot type in the reserved storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determining table. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 26, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the post-variation pattern based on random 3 and 4 according to the number of reserved storages and the presence / absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a loss, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the number of reserved storages, and after the selection, the post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 3 are used later. Determine the variation pattern. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16 according to the type of the big hit, and determines the post-variation pattern based on the selected post-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 4. decide.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the pre-variation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the pre-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 17 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and pre-variates based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5. Determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1105). S1106).

(Special symbol change processing)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop process (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 22. Control for derivation display is performed (step S1301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 21 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the change of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROМ101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and between rounds are performed for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal big hit of 3R, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning opening in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot of 5R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and the V large winning opening is opened at the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a probability variation jackpot of 10R, an opening mode in which the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V large winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. .. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the image display device 5 that a big hit has occurred), which is the big hit display time, is set in the big winning opening control timer (step S1307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set (step S1309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has ended, and the time reduction flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the reduced working hours state, the gaming state shifts from the reduced working hours state to the non-reduced working hours state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step S1311 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is set is set (step S1313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability change flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the reduced working hours state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) (step S1315), and in step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1316), and the processing is terminated.

(Pre-processing for opening big hits)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 29, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and the process is terminated.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during the opening of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 30, in the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step S1502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step S1503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is turned on (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability change determination flag is set (step S1506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability change determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability change determination device passage designation command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 83 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 31, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604). End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the open number counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step S1605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round in which the V large winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), the solenoid 83 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 32, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning region is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the probability change determination flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the probability change flag indicating that the probability change state is set is set (step S1707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S1710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability change determination flag is not set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set is set in step S1705 (step S1705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game state is the probability change, the time saving, or the normal game state by the probability change state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Main processing of production control)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. The effect control process process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 33. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. As shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it confirms whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (step S7103).

When the effect control CPU 120 determines that a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the loss symbol determination data table to determine the display result of the loss that does not reach as the final stop of the effect symbol (step). S7105), the process proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined in the process of step S7103 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), a stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (step S7104), and step S7106 Proceed to.

Further, when it is not decided to make a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is decided to make a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 configures a combination of big hit symbols according to the type of big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing the process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the group notice setting process), the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In step S7107, the symbol variation control is performed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operation) patterns specified by the effect control pattern of the effect determined in the process of step S7106. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the pattern table, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the effect symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the fluctuation display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream effect, and the effect display operation in the advance notice effect are stored as multiple types of symbol variation control patterns. Has been done.

Further, each symbol variation control pattern is used for displaying variation of the effect symbol such as the effect control process timer setting value, the effect control process timer determination value, the effect display control data, the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the end code. It includes control data for controlling various effect operations according to the situation, and the contents of various effect controls and the switching timing of the effect control are set in chronological order.

Next, the process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process of step S7109, the effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, etc.) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data). Then, the control of the speakers 8L, 8R) as the effect component is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, the image display device 5 outputs a command to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

(Group notice setting process)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice setting process. The group notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern command capable of executing the group advance notice has been received (step S7061). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 issues a variation pattern command including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 at the time of loss, and a variation pattern including a posterior variation pattern of posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 at the time of hitting. Determine if a command has been received. The variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 6 to 8 is the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 8 to 15, and the variation pattern including the posterior variation pattern of the posterior variation numbers 10 to 12 is the main variation number 18. It is a fluctuation pattern of ~ 26.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not received the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (N in step S7061), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command capable of executing the group notice (Y in step S7061), the effect control CPU 120 converts the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 22, since the pre-variation time is 41500 msec, the number of frames is about 1246, and since the post-variation time is 91900 msec, the number of frames is about 3000. Further, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26, since the pre-variation time is 62000 msec, the number of frames is about 1861, and since the post-variation time is 142,800 msec, the number of frames is about 4288. ..

The effect control CPU 120 executes a group notice lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the group notice lottery table shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B to determine whether or not to execute the group notice based on the post-variation number, and to execute the group notice. Determine the type of.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group has won the advance notice lottery. If the effect control CPU 120 is not won in the group notice lottery (N in step S7064), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 wins in the group notice lottery (Y in step S7064), the effect control pattern for executing the group notice according to the stage is extracted (step S7065), and the process ends.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 985th frame among the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 1385th frame out of the 3000 frames in the post-variation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of stage A, the effect control is performed so that the group notice is executed from the 1600th frame among the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. The pattern is set. Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main variation number 26 and in the case of the stage B, the effect control pattern is set so as to execute the group notice from the 2000th frame among the 4288 frames in the post-variation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group notice is executed in the pre-variation, whereas in the case of stage B, the group notice is executed in the post-variation. There is.

(Group notice execution processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display during effect process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame at a time from the number of frames corresponding to the effect control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is set, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the 6149th frame, which is the total number of frames.

When the effect control pattern for executing the group advance notice is not set (N in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control pattern for executing the group notice is set (Y in step S7202), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the frame of the group notice execution timing has been reached (S7203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26 and in the case of the stage A.

When the effect control CPU 120 has not reached the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (N in step S7203), the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 reaches the frame of the execution timing of the group notice (Y in step S7203), the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices to execute the group notice (step S7204). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to turn on, blink, or turn off the game effect lamp 9 based on the group notice lighting table shown in FIGS. 52 to 58, which will be described later, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L. Controls to output sound. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of the progress of the game]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probabilistic jackpots 1 to 4. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that urges the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow directed to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handedness are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 30 of the special figure LED board 20 and the right-handed display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 also prompt right-handed by lighting a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning openings are opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a normal big hit of 3R and 10 times in the case of a probable big hit of 10R). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced working hours state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V prize is generated during the big hit round, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled in the time saving state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special map fluctuation time (period in which the special map is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal map is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened is increased, so that the frequency at which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 becomes a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As described above, there are 5 to 9 probabilistic jackpots as the types of jackpots in the second special figure game. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 has continued from the time of the first hit.

During the round of the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the reduced time state and the probable change state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probable change state or time saving state after the big hit round is finished, and the player will be in the probable change state or time saving after the big hit round per continuous chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probable change state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 30, and the right-handed display unit 55 ends. As a result, the player hits the left again to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area.

[Design of group notice production]
Next, the design of the group notice effect in the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the group notice work process. As shown in FIG. 38, the work process of the group notice consists of a summary document creation process (step S901), an animation production process (step S902), this video production process (step S903), and an authoring process in the order of the work. (Step S904), sound creation process (step S905), lottery incorporating process (step S906), video incorporating process (step S907), sound incorporating process (step S908), and lamp data. The production step (step S909) and the lamp incorporating step (step S910) are included.

In the process of creating the summary document in step S901, a summary document for newly designing the group notice is created in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process of step S902, the storyboard of the animation used in the group notice is created, the characters and backgrounds used in the animation are designed, the V-conte is created as a script for creating the animation, and the CG for the animation is created. Production and actual animation production are performed.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group notice is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group notice is created in this video production process, but the reproduction time of the created video data is longer than the execution time of the group notice actually executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Created longer. As a result, even if the execution time of the group notice becomes long due to the design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as it is without being changed. Further, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played back at a predetermined timing for each production. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 22, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 985th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 1385th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from. Further, in the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26, the group notice animation is incorporated in this video so that the group notice of the stage A is executed from the 1600th frame, and the group notice of the stage B is the 2000th frame. The animation of the group notice is incorporated in this video so that the group notice is executed from.

In the authoring step of step S904, software (program) for video reproduction executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is created using the video data created in the video production step.

In the sound creation step of step S905, data of various sounds such as BGM (background sound) and sound effects used in the group notice are created in accordance with the video of the group notice.

In the process of incorporating the lottery in step S906, data about various lottery related to the group notice such as the group notice lottery is created. In the process of incorporating the lottery, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the group notice is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lottery executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding step of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed by the group notice.

In the sound incorporating step of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creating step is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound reproduction executed by the group notice.

In the lamp data creation step of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing in the lighting means (light emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in the group notice are created.

In the process of incorporating the lamp in step S910, various data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of lamps and LEDs created in the lamp data creation process are used as software for lamp reproduction executed in pachinko game 1. It is incorporated in the game machine 1.

Through the work in each of these steps, lottery, video, sound data, and the like related to the group notice effect are created and incorporated as software so as to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video production)
The main video production process of the group notice will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. 39 to 42 are diagrams for explaining an example of this video production process.

As shown in FIG. 39, first, in STEP 1, a character image used in the group notice is prepared. For example, in the group notice, the main character Yumemu-chan is used, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show the mode in which Yumemu-chan runs. It should be noted that such a character image is created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP2, using the moving image creation tool, a moving image in which the character steps on the four character images g1 to g4 is created. For example, when the video creation tool is started, the timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or a plurality of layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. Each layer is arranged in numerical order such as layers 1, 2, 3 ... from the top, and the more the layers are arranged on the top (that is, the younger the number), the more the image is on the back side on the screen of the image display device 5. It is designed to be located. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the values desired by the user.

In STEP2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a predetermined layer column. For example, in the example shown in (a), the character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to the layer 1 to form the moving image data A1 to A4. According to the moving image data A1 to A4, it is a stepping motion of a pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

If the set of the moving image data A1 to A4 for stepping created as described above is repeatedly arranged on the timeline, the moving image for the character to step on is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the moving image data A1 to A4 are repeated for three cycles. Then, this stepping video data is output. In this way, the stepping motion is created for the other characters by the same work.

As shown in FIG. 40, in STEP3, a moving image in which the character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X-axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the width of the XY-axis along the vertical direction on the screen is set to 640. In both the X-axis and the Y-axis, the value corresponding to the center position is 0. Therefore, the screen size is −400 ≦ X ≦ 400 and −320 ≦ Y ≦ 320.

By using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width at which the video data moves. For example, in the example shown in (b), one cycle of the stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and the data is linearly moved on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500. Is set to.

As shown in FIG. 41, in STEP 4, a moving image in which a plurality of characters progress is created. For example, in the example shown in (a), moving image data in which the character Jam-chan used for the group notice moves linearly on the X-axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created by the same creation procedure.

As described above, when moving image data that linearly moves on the X axis in the range of −1000 ≦ X ≦ 500 is created for a plurality of characters, the moving image data of each character is placed on different layers as shown in (b). Deploy. Also, if the time axis is shifted between the characters, the timing of appearance can be shifted. Further, by shifting the position of the Y-axis between the characters, the position on the Y-axis in which the character appears can be shifted. The Z axis is an axis between the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the front side (front side) and the back side (depth side) of the screen are input. It is possible to design the effect of the group notice (Boingo group notice of the present embodiment) so that the character moves between the side and the side.

As shown in FIG. 42, in STEP 5, a moving image of the group notice is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), by arranging the moving image data of six types of characters such as characters A to F on the timeline of the layer, the moving image of the group notice is completed.

In addition, if the length of the video data on the timeline is changed, the animation itself changes the speed at which the character moves while maintaining the video in which the video of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles. Can be done. For example, the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is the moving image data in which the moving image of the pattern consisting of the character images g1 to g4 is repeated for three cycles, like the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. , The length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline in the moving image data of the character C arranged on the layer 9. As a result, the character C arranged on the layer 10 advances on the screen at a faster speed than the character C arranged on the layer 9 while maintaining the same animation as the character C arranged on the layer 9. ..

In the 6-person group notice, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, also in the example shown in FIG. 42A, moving image data of a plurality of characters are not arranged on the timeline at the same timing and at the same length.

Further, as shown in (b), if the moving image data of sand smoke is arranged on the layer 1 located on the backmost side, the moving image of sand smoke can be combined with the moving image in which a plurality of characters progress.

As described above, it is possible to create moving image data of a group notice in which a plurality of characters progress. In the actual creation of the video data of the group notice, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the game board 2 covers the screen. The video data of the group notice is created with the area corresponding to the position covered with a mask. Further, the group notice moving image data is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that the screen can be applied to a size larger than a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches).

(Group notice work process)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the 6-person group notice. As shown in FIG. 43, in the 6-person group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which 6 characters such as maid A to maid F progress as a group is displayed. The group notice effect is not limited to the six characters, but the appearance of a plurality of each character makes it possible to display the largest number of characters among the effects that can be performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since Maid A to Maid F all wear the same or substantially the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the type of character other than recognizing by face. In the present embodiment, the design of the apron worn by each character is different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Maid A is Yume-chan, who is the main character, and Maid B is Jam-chan, who is the next highest priority character of Yume-chan, who is the main character.

In the 6-person group notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, face or foot) does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and protrudes. In some cases. For example, of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 6 maids A (Yumemu-chan) will appear, but 5 of them have visible faces. That is, the face of one of the six maids A appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids B (Jam-chan) will appear, but 4 of them have visible faces. That is, the face of one of the five maids B appears does not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids C will appear, of which 3 maids C can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid C do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids D will appear, of which 3 maids D can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid D do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids E will appear, of which 3 maids E can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid E do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the 6-person group notice, 5 maids F will appear, of which 3 maids F can see their faces. That is, the faces of two of the five maids appearing in the maid F do not fit in the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice effect are the character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and the character in which a part of the whole body (for example, the face) does not fit in the display area of the screen. This includes a character in which other parts of the whole body (for example, a part other than the face) are displayed within the display area of the screen.

In addition, the plurality of characters displayed in the group notice production are characters of low importance in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as maids C to F, and maid A (Yumemu-chan) and maid B (jam-chan). Including characters that are more important than maids C to F in the contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1, maids A and B have a whole body that does not fit in the display area of the screen as compared to maids C to F. The proportion of parts other than the face that fit in the display area of the screen and are displayed is low. That is, the maid A and the maid B are designed to have a higher proportion of appearances while showing their faces than the maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining an auxiliary display used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 44, in the group notice effect, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the character is progressing. In the present embodiment, an image of sand smoke is displayed as an auxiliary display. Displaying an image of sand smoke near the character, more effectively following the progressing character, can make the player feel as if the character's progress is causing sand smoke, and so on. It is possible to emphasize the mode in which the character runs through. As shown in FIG. 42 (b) described above, the image of sand smoke, which is an auxiliary display, is arranged on the layer 1 located on the backmost side. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44, the image of sand smoke is located on the back side of any of the appearing characters.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, since the layer on which the image of maid E is arranged is on the front side of the layer on which the image of maid C is arranged, the image of maid E is from the image of maid C. Is also displayed on the front side. On the other hand, the image of the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is located on the back side of both the image of the maid E and the image of the maid C.

In this way, when the display of the maid E and the display of the maid C overlap, the display of the maid E has priority over the display of the other maid C, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E is used. When the display of the maid C overlaps with the display of the maid C, the display of the maid C has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the maid E.

(Motion blur processing)
FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur process used in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 45, in the group notice effect, motion blur processing is applied to the progressing character. Motion blur processing is a process for displaying an afterimage of an object (for example, a character). By performing motion blur processing on the display of a progressing character, an afterimage of the character is displayed after the progressing character. It will be displayed. This makes it possible to create a dynamic group notice effect. Further, when the image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps with the image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the motion blur processing for the one character is performed so as not to impair the visibility of the other character. The image is transparent.

(Aspect of contour when characters overlap)
FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining an aspect of contours when characters overlap in a group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 46, in the group notice effect, one character may overtake another character. At that time, when the display of the character to be overtaken and the display of the other character overlap, the outline of the character to be overtaken is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid F overtakes the maid F. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid F, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid F.

Further, in the example shown in (b), it is shown that the maid B located on the front side of the maid A overtakes the maid A, but in this case, the contour of the maid B is larger than the contour of the maid A. It is thicker and Maid B is highlighted more than Maid A. Further, it is shown that the maid A located on the front side of the maid D overtakes the maid D. In this case, the contour of the maid A is thicker than the contour of the maid D, and the maid A It is displayed with more emphasis than Maid D.

When one character overtakes another character, it is not limited to thickening the outline of one character, but the size of one character may be increased or the brightness of one character may be higher than the brightness of another character. It may be displayed with one character emphasized more than the other characters by increasing the height or making the contrast of one character clearer than the contrast of the other characters.

(Display on the screen of the image display device)
FIG. 47 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group notice effect. As shown in FIGS. 44 to 46 described above, since the gaming board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. Of the edges, the portion covered by the game board 2 is invisible. However, as shown in FIG. 47, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be visually recognized.

Here, in FIG. 47, as shown in (a), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, as shown in (b), the entire maid A displayed first is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is the first. The second, which is displayed more than the situation, and the whole of the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not displayed yet, while a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) is displayed. It has been shown that the situation will be. Further, the first displayed character (maid A) and the second displayed character (maid B) have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs when the image display device 5 is visually recognized with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the game board 2 and the image display are displayed. This occurs regardless of whether the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking through the device 5. That is, FIG. 47 is a case where the image display device 5 is visually recognized while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 7B, the game board 2 is an image display device. Even if the edge of the screen of 5 is covered, the whole maid A (Yumemu-chan) who is the main character is not yet displayed in the 6-person group notice, but a part of the maid A (this example). Then, from the first situation where a part of the face) is displayed, the whole of the first displayed maid A is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than the first situation, and 2 The second situation is that while the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

(Overview of Baku Chu Mondai Notice)
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an overall picture of the Baku Chu Mondai notice. As shown in FIG. 48, in the Baku Chu group notice included in the group notice effect, an image in which characters such as Baku Chu progress as a group is displayed.

In the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the character image may fit in the display area of the image display device 5, or a part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit in the display area of the image display device 5 and may protrude. In some cases.

As described above, in the Baku Chu Mondai notice, the moving image data of the Baku Chu Mondai notice is created by arranging the image of the animation in which one kind of character moves on the screen. The moving image data in the Baku Chu Mondai notice is also created based on the work process shown in FIGS. 38 to 42 by the same method as the moving image data in the 6-person group notice.

(Volume change and brightness data table in group notice production)
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a change in volume and a luminance data table in the group notice effect. As shown in FIG. 49, the group notice production (6 person group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo group notice) includes the first display period (1000 msec), the second display period (1310 msec), and the third display period (830 msec). It is divided into.

The first display period is a period from the first start of the character display in the group notice effect to the first end of the character display. More specifically, the first display period is a period from the first appearance of any character in the group notice effect to the first disappearance of any character. For example, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character progresses at the top as it is, the period until the one character disappears is the first display period. Alternatively, if one character first appears in the group notice effect and the one character is overtaken by another character, the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen is the first display period. .. In the present embodiment, in the first display period, the display of the second displayed character ends before the display of the first displayed character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second appearing character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which the state in which the display of the new character starts and ends continues. More specifically, in the second display period, after any character disappears first in the group notice effect, a state in which new characters appear one after another continues, and the last character appears. It is the period until it appears. The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period. Further, in the second display period, the number of characters appearing is larger than in each of the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period in which the display of the character ends without starting the display of the new character. More specifically, the third display period is a period from the appearance of the last character in the group notice effect to the disappearance of all the characters. The character that disappears last is not limited to the character that appears last, and may be a character that is omitted by the character that appears last. The third display period is longer than the first display period.

Regarding the change in volume in the group notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the effect sound of the effect sound is started in the first display period. The volume is raised to a specific volume, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 48, with respect to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, the volume is the minimum (for example, mute or the lowest volume) at the beginning of the first display period, and then gradually increases gradually. It reaches the specified value and is maintained at the specified value (for example, set volume or maximum volume) thereafter. Even in the second display period, the volume remains at the specified value. After that, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at a specified value, and then gradually decreases to the minimum.

It should be noted that the stepwise increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value in the first display period is referred to as volume fade-in. Further, the process in which the volume gradually decreases from the specified value to the minimum in the third display period is referred to as volume fade-out. In the present embodiment, the fade-in time from the output of the effect sound in the first display period to the increase in the volume of the effect sound from the minimum to the specified value decreases the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from the beginning to the minimum volume of the effect sound.

The luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means are frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric. Includes game effect lamps such as Chu Lamp 9H, Stick Controller Lamp 9J, and Trigger Button Lamp 9K. The luminance data table includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period, a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period. .. That is, in the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinks, or turned off based on the brightness data included in the first brightness data table, and is included in the second brightness data table in the second display period. The predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off based on the brightness data, and in the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 is turned on, blinked, or turned off based on the brightness data included in the third brightness data table. Or turn off.

(Timing of 6-person notice at stage A)
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the occurrence timing of the 6-person group notice in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the 6-person group notice is executed from the 1600th frame during the previous fluctuation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The 6-person group notice starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the latter half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames) (2331th frame). The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). It starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the variation pattern of variation number 26, which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) in which the 6-person group notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the 6-person group notice starts in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the 6-person group notice is executed (1600th frame) is close to half of the total variation time (6149 frames) (about 3074th frame) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). (The second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 10 to 15 which is lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the 6-person notice is not configured to start in the first half (1600th frame) of the predetermined period. .. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or in the final reach, from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the 6-person group notice may be started in the first half of the predetermined period.

FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the occurrence timing of the Baku Chu Mondai notice in the stage B. As described above, in stage B, the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 51, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9 which is lost in the first half of SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames). The Baku Chu Mondai notice starts from the 66600msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9 which is lost in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the latter half of the total variation time (2984 frames). That is, in the case of loss in the first half of SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a loss display result ( In the 2984 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the latter half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period.

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 20 that hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 20 that is hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th ram) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4662 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In 4662 frames), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing at which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed (2000th frame) is close to half (2331th frame) of the total variation time (4662 frame) in the first half of the total variation time (4662 frame). (The second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 23 that is hit in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result ( In the 4861 frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 2430th frame) of the total variation time (4861 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (4861 frames). Timing (second half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 26 that hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the front fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames) and the fluctuation time of the rear fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames). , It starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 26 which is a hit in the final reach, the timing (2000th frame) in which the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed belongs to the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). That is, in the case of a hit in the final reach, it is a case where it is suggested that it is a display result, and a predetermined period (6149) from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is a hit display result. In the frame), the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. Furthermore, the timing (2000th frame) when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed is close to half (about 3074th frame) of the total variation time (6149 frames) in the first half of the total variation time (6149 frames). Timing (second half).

In the present embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 10 to 15 which is lost in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set longer, so that the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the predetermined period until it is suggested that the variable display is a loss display result, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts in the first half (2000th frame) of the predetermined period. do not have. However, even in the case of fluctuation patterns of fluctuation numbers 10 to 15 that are lost in the latter half of the SP reach or in the final reach, from the start of the variable display until it is suggested that the variable display is the lost display result. In a predetermined period, the first display period of the Baku Chu Mondai notice within the predetermined period may be configured to start.

[Brightness data]
With reference to FIGS. 52 to 76, the luminance data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 controls various lighting means in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. These luminance data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light emitting) portion of the game effect lamp according to the display in the group notice based on the luminance data stored in the luminance data table. In the present embodiment, the lit place literally means a lit place, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the lit place is referred to as a lit place, and other lamps. The place where the lamp that is not lit (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the lit place. In another example, the lighting location refers to a portion that is lit with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located is lit. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the lit place is located may not be called the lit place.

More specifically, the data (also referred to as an element) for turning on or off the lamp is defined by the luminance data table, and in such a luminance data table, in the data storage area referred to by a specific lamp. If 0 data (for example, "000" data corresponding to RGB) is stored, the specific lamp is turned off. Further, when the data storage area referred to by the specific lamp does not exist in the luminance data table, or the luminance data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp is turned off. On the other hand, there is a luminance data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB are stored in the data storage area referenced by the specific lamp. If is stored, the specific lamp is lit. For example, when a specific effect such as a big hit notice effect is executed at the time of an effect corresponding to a normal background, the specific lamp is referred to in the specific effect. Even if the data of a specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table, if the data of a specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referred to in the effect corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp is lit. Will be done.

(Parent table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 52, in the parent table in the group warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the group notice effect is defined.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 3140 msec so as to match the group notice effect.

(Child table in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 53, in the child table in the group advance notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 85 to 86 and 141 to 143, which will be described later), among the periods in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is about W1 and the accessory lamp 9A is about. A grandchild table of Y1, L1 for the left lamp 9B, U1 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the first display period correspond to the first luminance data table shown in FIG. 49.

In the second display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W2, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y2. A grandchild table of L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second luminance data table shown in FIG. 49.

In the third display period (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 89, 90, 146, and 147, which will be described later), the frame lamp is W3, and the accessory lamp 9A is Y3. A grandchild table of L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third luminance data table shown in FIG. 49.

As shown in FIG. 53, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the group notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the combination in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: an object lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located at a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect (for example, near the appearance of the character in the group notice effect), but since it is not used in the group notice effect, its grandchild table Is not prepared. Since the V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V prize can be generated is in progress or that a V prize has occurred, or a lamp that notifies that a jackpot has occurred, in the group notice production. If it lights up, it will be misunderstood that the player is winning a V or winning a big hit, and in order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is used in the group notice production. Not. The V lamp 9G may be provided at another position such as the vicinity of the left lamp 9B on the board as a position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect, but even in this case, the group notice effect is also provided. It may not be used in.

Further, the stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B are located at positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group advance notice effect (for example, the character advances in the group advance notice effect). However, since it is not used in the group notice production, its grandchildren's table is not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J is lit to encourage an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A in an operation effect (effect shown in FIG. 122 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K is a PUSH effect (FIG. 83 (described later)). Since the lamp is lit to encourage the operation of pressing the push button 31B in the effect shown in a19), the player can operate the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B if the lamp is lit in the group notice effect. This is because the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group notice production in order to avoid such inconvenience. The stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K may be provided at other positions such as near the left panel lamp 9B as positions related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect. However, it may not be used in the group notice production.

The features of the grandchild tables W1 to W3 used for the grandchild table in the group notice production are summarized below. Specifically, the number of high-luminance lighting points is larger in W2 than in W1. Regarding the switching interval, W1 controls lighting at equal intervals at 100 msec, while W2 controls lighting at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and for W3, 10 msec with respect to the frame left lamp 9L. While lighting control is performed at short intervals, lighting control is performed at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the lighting pattern, the brightness data is specified so that W1 is lit with high brightness while moving the lighting location according to the traveling direction of the group notice, while W2 is lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. Luminance data is specified so that the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice for W3. There is. Regarding the first luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that all the lamps are turned off or turned on at low luminance in W1, whereas the W2 and W3 are made to emit light at high luminance at the predetermined lighting points. Luminance data is specified. On the other hand, regarding the final luminance data, the luminance data is specified so that the W3 turns off all the lamps or turns on the lamps with low luminance for both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R.

Regarding the luminance data loop, the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W1 and W3, whereas the luminance data is specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in W2. W1 and W3 are specified for the 10-minute luminance data for defect countermeasures, whereas W2 is not specified.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec. Further, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified. Further, in W1, the first luminance data, which is a combination of the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance, and the first luminance data for each hour. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R" for all the lamps included in the frame lamp, and "G" and "G" and " "0" indicating that the light is turned off is specified in "B". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a22) and 141 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low brightness. It will be like. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on. In the present embodiment, in order to make the effect effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "1" indicating low brightness is defined in "R", and "G" and "B" are specified. For example, when each lamp is lit mainly in green, "1" indicating low brightness is specified in "G", and "R" and "B" are specified. It suffices if "0" indicating extinguishing is specified in, and when each lamp lights mainly in blue, "1" indicating low brightness is specified in "B" and extinguished in "R" and "G". It suffices if "0" indicating is specified.

Further, in W1, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the lamps that are lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 to the frame left lamp are at equal intervals of 100 msec from T1-2 to T1-10. Luminance data is specified to move with. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 corresponds to the part where the character appears in the group notice, and the brightness data is displayed so that the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character advances. It is stipulated. The left frame lamp is initially turned off or turned on at low brightness, and gradually increases as the location of the lamp that lights at high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights up with luminance. On the other hand, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8, which were initially lit with high brightness, are turned off or lit with low brightness as the portion of the lamp that is lit with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. Luminance data is specified in. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 and 141 to 143, which will be described later, the frame lamp is also from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character appears from the right end of the screen and progresses in the group notice. The position where it lights up with high brightness changes toward the left side.

Further, in W1, the data including data for turning on one frame lamp with high brightness and turning off another frame lamp adjacent to the one frame lamp is included, and the brightness is such that the portion of the lamp that is turned on in stages moves. The data is specified. As a result, in W1, the location of the lamp that lights up with high brightness can be moved according to the direction in which the character travels.

Further, in W1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the frame lamps are sparsely high in brightness according to the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamps when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

Here, if the data for this 10 minutes is not provided, the lamp lighting control is performed again from T1-1 when the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lamp does not shift to W2 due to some abnormality. Even though the character of the group notice has already appeared and is progressing, as shown by the dotted arrow, it is high again from the vicinity of the frame right lamp 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10. The part of the lamp that lights up with brightness will move, giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, in the present embodiment, since the data for 10 minutes is provided in T1-11, even if the lighting control is performed using W1 and the lighting is not transferred to W2 due to some abnormality, the data is set in 10 minutes. Since the frame lamp can be turned on in a light emitting mode suitable for the grandchild table W2, it is possible to prevent a feeling of strangeness. Then, if the abnormality is resolved in these 10 minutes, the player can continue the game without any particular discomfort.

In W1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. ..

In addition, the luminance data for 10 minutes specified in W1 for troubleshooting is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location deviates from the state of the previous T1-10. be.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is transmitted to each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. It is stipulated. Further, in W2, the first luminance data, which is a combination of the data for turning off each lamp included in the frame lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance, and the first luminance data for each hour. The combination of the data for turning off each lamp or turning on the lamp with low luminance and the data for turning on each lamp with high luminance is composed of the second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data of each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also specified for each of the other hours.

In W2, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamp contains brightness data and is sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W2, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to be lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the frame lamp is set according to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. Will be sparsely lit with high brightness. Further, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W1.

Since the W2 is not provided with the luminance data for troubleshooting as in the W1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10. Here, even if the lighting control of the lamp is performed again from T2-1 when the lighting control is performed using W2 and the lamp does not shift to W3 due to some abnormality, the frame lamp is sparsely high. Since the mode of lighting with brightness is merely repeated, the player does not feel any discomfort.

Further, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all of the data referred to for each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but the time for creating each data. Also, it takes time to confirm that the created data is correct, which is very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of the present embodiment, by repeatedly using the luminance data over T2-1 to T2-10 to perform lighting control, only one set of data that is repeatedly referred to can be created. The time efficiency can be improved. The reason why the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using one set of data in the second display period in the group notice effect is that the second display period in the group notice effect is larger than the first display period and the third display period. Since the second display period is long and the second display period is a time zone in which the screen is filled with a plurality of characters and the plurality of characters proceed as a group, the lighting corresponding to such an effect is lit. This is because it is sufficient to repeat the same lighting as the embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 54 (c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is transmitted to the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. It is stipulated. After that, RGB data is specified over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T3-7 to T3-38 at long intervals of 80 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W3, as indicated by the dotted arrow, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 from T3-2 to T3-30 are gradually turned off or lowered gradually. Increase the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness so that they turn on at brightness. Further, for T3-7 to T3-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 80 msec, whereas in the group notice, the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances. For ~ 9L12, the luminance data is specified so that the luminance is turned off or the luminance is changed from high luminance to low luminance at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 89, 90, 146, and 147, which will be described later, the frame lamp also changes from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned off or the position where the light is turned on at low brightness is changed.

Further, in W3, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low luminance at the time of transition to T3-30. Further, in W3, similarly to W1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

In W3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the accessory lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 55, the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "RRRR". Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. It should be noted that the monochromatic LED has fewer filters that block light than the full-color LED, so that the spectrum is strongly emitted. Therefore, the monochromatic LED has a smaller luminance data corresponding to the higher luminance than the full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In Y1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a22) and 141 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the accessory lamp 9A is set according to the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In Y1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In Y2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are arranged in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9A will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in Y2 as in Y1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in Y3, similarly to Y1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the accessory lamp 9A is lit at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A when the next production is started.

In Y3, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the panel left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the luminance data table shown in FIG. 56, the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are sequentially "corresponded to". It is expressed as "WWWWWW". Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In L1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a22) and 141 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the panel left lamp 9B is set according to the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that the lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In L1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the left panel lamp 9B over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In L2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the left side of the board is adjusted to the state in which the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. The lamp 9B will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in L2 as in L1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 56 (c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in L3, similarly to L1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the panel left lamp 9B is lit with low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the panel left lamp 9B when the next production is performed.

In L3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the group warning luminance data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 has a plurality of colors (in this example, red (in this example). It is an LED (3 colors of R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number of "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the on-board lamp 9C, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In U1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a22) and 141 (b43) described later, at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect, all the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C are turned off or have low brightness. It will light up. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in U1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, the on-board lamp 9C is set according to the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next second display period is entered. The brightness data is specified so that the lights are sparsely lit with high brightness.

In U1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 57 (b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, for each lamp of the on-board lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Luminance data is specified.

In U2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the characters are grouped on the board in the group notice effect. The lamp 9C will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the U2 is not provided with the luminance data for troubleshooting as in the U1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 57 (c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. .. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in U3, similarly to U1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the on-board lamp 9C when the next production is started.

In U3, since the luminance data for 10 minutes for troubleshooting as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T3-1 to T3-38. ..

In any of U1, U2, and U3, only the data of "0" is specified for the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 which are monochromatic. That is, the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group notice production.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in group notice brightness data table)
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the group warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is from "0" to "0". Brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number of "F". “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "6" as data. "0" is data corresponding to turning off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. As described above, the high-luminance value used in the multi-color LED is larger than the high-luminance value used in the monochromatic LED. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even if the LED is only white such as the V attacker lamp 9F, the value indicating high brightness is set to "6" at the maximum. ing.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and further. In the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

In A1, "1" or "0" indicating low brightness is specified for all lamps in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 84 (a22) and 141 (b43) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are turned off at the beginning of the first display period in the group notice effect. Or it comes to light at low brightness. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

Further, in A1, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. In this 10 minutes, each lamp has sparsely high brightness according to the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of each lamp when the next second display period is entered. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

In A1, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T1-1 to T1-10. ..

As shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. Has been done.

In A2, one lamp is lit with high brightness, and the other lamps adjacent to the one lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamps that are sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness change. Luminance data is specified as such. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 87, 88, 144, and 145, which will be described later, in the second display period in the group notice effect, the attacker lamps match the appearance of the characters forming a group in the group notice effect. The 9E, the electric Chu lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F will be sparsely lit with high brightness.

Since the luminance data for troubleshooting is not provided in the A2 as in the A1, the lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. After that, luminance data is defined over T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Further, in A3, as in A1, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F when shifting to the next production. The brightness data is specified so that the lamp 9F is turned off or turned on at low brightness.

In A3, since the luminance data for the trouble countermeasure for 10 minutes as described above is defined, the lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the luminance data over T3-1 to T3-38. ..

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 59, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the reach line effect is defined.

Unlike the group notice effect, the reach line effect is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative symbol will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and the game is that the reach is reached. It is a production that suggests (or informs) the person. In the reach line effect, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 82 and 129 to 132, which will be described later, a streak of light (also referred to as a reach line) appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 together with a flash of light. , The reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (in the left-right direction) so as to connect the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table in the reach line luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 1500 msec so as to match the reach line effect.

(Child table in reach line data table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach line luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 60, in the child table in the reach line luminance data table, the time of the reach line effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (luminance data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the period during which the reach line effect is executed, the period during which the flash occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 79 (a8), (a9) and 129 (a8), (a9) described later) is a frame. A grandchild table of W11 for the lamp, Y11 for the accessory lamp 9A, L11 for the left panel lamp 9B, U11 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, during the period in which the reach line occurs (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 80 and 130 described later), the frame lamp is W12, the accessory lamp 9A is Y12, and the left panel lamp. A grandchild table of L12 is provided for each of 9B. Since the on-board lamp 9C and the attacker lamp 9E are not used during the period when the reach line is generated, the grandchild table is not prepared.

Among the periods in which the reach line effect is executed, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (shown in FIGS. 81 (a13) to 82 (b17) and FIGS. 131 (a13) to 132 (b17) described later). During the production period), a grandchild table of W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the accessory lamp 9A, L13 for the left panel lamp 9B, U13 for the onboard lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacker lamp 9E is provided.

Of the period during which the reach line effect is executed, during the period when the reach line disappears (the period of the effect shown in FIGS. 82 (a18) and 132 (b18) described later), the frame lamp is W14 and the accessory lamp 9A is Y14. , L14 for the left board lamp 9B, U14 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 60, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, the frame left in any of the period in which the flash occurs, the period in which the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward, and the period in which the reach line disappears. Six types of brightness data tables are provided: a lamp 9L, a frame right lamp 9R, an accessory lamp 9A, a board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp. On the other hand, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the reach line effect, in the brightness data table referred to during the period when the reach line is generated, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the accessory lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B. Four types of brightness data tables are provided.

As described above, in the reach line effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect or a smaller number of lamps than the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 61A, in the grandchild table W11, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line production is a production that suggests to the player that it has reached reach, and is not a production that arouses the player's expectation by suggesting a big hit like the group notice production. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate lighting control such as providing different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually as in the group notice effect. Common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together. Furthermore, since the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group advance notice effect, it is elaborate to provide different luminance data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and control each lamp individually as in the group advance notice effect. Rather than performing lighting control, common brightness data is provided for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L, and each lamp is controlled together.

In W11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 79 (a8) and 129 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ..

As shown in FIG. 61B, in the grandchild table W12, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 130 described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 61 (c), in the grandchild table W13, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen have high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified so that it lights up with.

As shown in FIG. 61 (d), in the grandchild table W14, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, the luminance data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a18) and 132 (b18) described later, the frame lamp is turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 62A, in the grandchild table Y11, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 79 (a8) and 129 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash is generated. ing.

As shown in FIG. 62B, in the grandchild table Y12, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 130 described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 62 (c), in the grandchild Tave Y13, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T13-1 to T13-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the accessory lamp 9A are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 62 (d), in the grandchild table Y14, the luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a18) and 132 (b18), which will be described later, the accessory lamp 9A is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a panel left lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in the grandchild table L11, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 79 (a8) and 129 (b8) described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance at the timing when the flash occurs. ing.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the grandchild table L12, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 130 described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), in the grandchild table L13, the luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B from T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated.

As shown in FIG. 63 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the panel left lamp 9B over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a18) and 132 (b18), which will be described later, the left panel lamp 9B is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 64 (a), in the grandchild table U11, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 79 (a8) and 129 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, among the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are used. Luminance data is specified so that the lamp lights up with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the grandchild table U13, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131, which will be described later, among the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, the lamps other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are lit with high brightness while the reach line is generated. Luminance data is specified as such.

As shown in FIG. 64 (d), in the grandchild table L14, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a18) and 132 (b18) described later, the on-board lamp 9C is also turned off when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the reach line luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". "F" represents the brightness. Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the grandchild table A11, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 79 (a8) and 129 (b8) described later, at the timing when the flash occurs, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are bright so as to light up with high brightness. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), in the grandchild table A13, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at intervals of 60 msec. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 131, which will be described later, the luminance data is defined so that the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are lit with high luminance while the reach line is generated. There is.

As shown in FIG. 65 (d), in the grandchild table A14, the luminance data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is “0”. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a18) and 132 (b18) described later, the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F are also turned off as the reach line disappears.

(Parent table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 66, in the parent table in the background warning brightness data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), accessory lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board lamp 9C, and attacker lamp 9E. For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, each effect time of the background notice effect is defined.

Unlike the group notice effect, the background notice effect is an effect that announces that the display result of the variable display by the special figure or the decorative pattern will be the display result that the jackpot symbol stops, and is a effect that a specific character (for example, jam) is announced. Chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, the background of the starry sky).

In the parent table in the background notice luminance data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over 5500 msec so as to match the background notice effect.

(Child table in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background warning luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 67, in the child table in the background advance notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table (brightness data table) referred to in each time zone is used. Also called) is specified.

For example, in the first 2000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W21, the accessory lamp 9A is Y21, the board left lamp 9B is L21, the board lamp 9C is U21, and the attacker lamp 9E. A grandchild table of A21 is provided respectively.

During the 100 msec period during which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W22, the accessory lamp 9A is Y22, the board left lamp 9B is L22, the board lamp 9C is U22, and the attacker lamp 9E is A22. Each grandchild table is provided.

In the final 600,000 msec of the period in which the background notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W23, the accessory lamp 9A is Y23, the board left lamp 9B is L23, the board lamp 9C is U23, and the attacker lamp 9E is A23. Each grandchild table is provided.

As shown in FIG. 67, regarding the brightness data table referred to in the background notice effect, the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, and the accessory lamp 9A are used in any of the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the last 600,000 msec. , A board left lamp 9B, a board lamp 9C, and an attacker lamp are provided with six types of brightness data tables.

As described above, in the background advance notice effect, the luminance data table is provided for the same number of lamps as the group advance notice effect.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 68A, in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 68B, in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is. Data common to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is used. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is defined for each lamp from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for accessory lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the accessory lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 69A, in the grandchild table Y21, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 69 (b), in the grandchild table Y22, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 69 (c), in the grandchild Tave Y23, luminance data is defined for the accessory lamp 9A from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a left lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the panel left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the grandchild table L21, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the grandchild table L22, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 70 (c), in the grandchild table L23, luminance data is defined for the left panel lamp 9B from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in the background warning brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is as follows. The brightness is represented by "0" to "F". Further, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the grandchild table U21, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the grandchild table U22, luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C over T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 71 (c), in the grandchild table U23, the luminance data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T23-1 to T23-6 while repeating at 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Grandchild table for attacker lamp in background notice brightness data table)
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in the background warning luminance data table. Each of the attacker lamp 9E and the electric chew lamp 9H is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0". The brightness is represented by "F". Further, the V attacker lamp 9F is a monochromatic (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented by "0" to "F" as data. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 72 (a), in the grandchild table A21, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is increased over T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 72 (b), in the grandchild table A22, the brightness of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is increased from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec. The data is specified.

As shown in FIG. 72 (c), in the grandchild Tave A23, each lamp of the attacker lamp 9E, the electric chew lamp 9H, and the V attacker lamp 9F is repeated at 240 msec and 230 msec from T23-1 to T23-6. Luminance data is specified for.

(Brightness data table when all lights are on)
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining an example of the brightness data table at the time of full lighting. As shown in FIGS. 73A to 73H, in the full lighting brightness data table, the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board lamp 9C, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, High-brightness brightness data (the maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the electric chew lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K. There is.

(Brightness data table during PUSH production)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of the luminance data table at the time of PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that encourages an operation of pressing the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 83 (a19) described later.

FIG. 74A shows the luminance data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, luminance data is specified for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at intervals of 20 msec. The lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J at the time of the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

FIG. 74 (b) shows the luminance data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, luminance data is defined for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The lighting color of the trigger button lamp 9K during the PUSH effect is the same color as the lighting color at which the frame lamp or the like is lit in the group notice effect (red in this example).

(Child table in the group notice luminance data table related to the modified example)
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modified example. As shown in FIG. 75, in the child table in the group notice luminance data table according to the modification, the time of the group notice effect is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone. (Also called a luminance data table) is specified.

For example, in the period (2000 msec) until the middle of the first display period in the period in which the group notice effect is executed, the frame lamp is W101, the accessory lamp 9A is Y101, the left panel lamp 9B is L101, and the on-board lamp. A grandchild table of U101 is provided for 9C and A101 is provided for the attacker lamp 9E. These grandchild tables correspond to the first luminance data table according to the modified example.

During the period (2790 msec) during the rest of the first display period, the second display period, and the middle of the third display period (2790 msec) during the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W102 is used for the frame lamp and Y102 is used for the accessory lamp 9A. , L102 for the left board lamp 9B, U102 for the on-board lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the second luminance data table according to the modified example.

In the remaining period (150 msec) of the third display period of the period in which the group notice effect is executed, W103 is used for the frame lamp, Y103 is used for the accessory lamp 9A, L103 is used for the left side lamp 9B, and U103 is used for the onboard lamp 9C. , And a grandchild table of A103 for the attacker lamp 9E, respectively. These grandchild tables correspond to the third luminance data table according to the modified example.

As described above, in the group advance notice brightness data table according to the modification, the control of the game effect lamp 9 is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period in the first brightness data table, and during the first display period. The control of the game effect lamp 9 ends, and in the second brightness data table, the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the first display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 continues even during the second display period. Then, the control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and the control of the game effect lamp 9 starts during the third display period in the third brightness data table.

(Grandchild table for frame lamp in group notice brightness data table related to modified example)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the group warning luminance data table according to the modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED having a plurality of colors (in this example, three colors of red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data is "0" to "F". The brightness is represented by a hexadecimal number. “0” is data corresponding to turning off, and “1” to “F” are data corresponding to turning on. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low-luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high-luminance lighting, respectively. When extinguishing is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is defined for each lamp from T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and further, the last time T101-11. In, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) for troubleshooting is specified.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is specified for each lamp from T102-1 to T102-10 at non-equal intervals at 50 to 80 msec. In W102, one frame lamp is lit with high brightness, and other frame lamps adjacent to the one frame lamp are also lit with high brightness. The lamp contains brightness data and is sparsely (randomly) lit with high brightness. Luminance data is specified so that For example, in W102, high-luminance data (for example, “A”) is sparsely defined so as to be lit with high brightness over a plurality of locations. As a result, in the group notice effect, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness according to the appearance of the characters advancing in a group in the group notice effect. Further, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps with higher brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and the frame right lamp from T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified over T103-7 to T103-38 at short intervals of 2 msec for the frame left lamp, and continues over T103-7 to T103-38 at long intervals of 14 msec for the frame right lamp. RGB data is specified.

Further, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the lamps that were lit with high brightness from the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned off with low brightness. Or increase the number of lamps that light up at low brightness. Further, for T103-7 to T103-38, in the case of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, the luminance data is specified at intervals of 14 msec, whereas in the group notice, the frame left lamp 9L5 located in the direction in which the character advances. For ~ 9L12, the luminance data is specified so that the luminance is turned off or the luminance is changed from high luminance to low luminance at short intervals of 2 msec. As a result, the position where the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness is changed from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left end of the screen in the group notice.

Further, in W103, the luminance data is defined so that all the lamps included in the frame lamp are turned off or turned on at low luminance at the time of transition to T103-30. Further, in W103, similarly to W101, luminance data for defect countermeasures is defined in the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. In this 10 minutes, the brightness data is defined so that the frame lamp is turned off or turned on at low brightness so that there is no discomfort in the lighting mode of the frame lamp when the next production is performed.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 162. In the present embodiment, an effect mode in which any of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 in which the pseudo fluctuation is performed twice is selected will be described. Further, in the figure, how each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks is shown by hatching.

(Direction mode in stage A)
The production mode in the stage A will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 99.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image in which the maid A (Yumemu-chan) is flying is displayed as the character appearing in the stage A. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 77 (a2), when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the character "x2" indicating that the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 77 (a3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a4), when the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the character "x3" indicating that the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 78 (a5). , The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (a6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a7), a decorative symbol for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 79 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 65. In the state shown in FIG. 79 (a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 80 (a12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 80, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 81 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 81 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 81, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 82 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further reduced, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further reduced in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 82 (a18), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 83 (a19) when the 6-person group notice is executed, and FIG. 92 when the background notice is executed. The effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 93 (a111), and when the lamp advance notice is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 93 (a111).

As mentioned above, the 6-person group notice is a production that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and 6 characters dressed as maids are grouped. It is a production that progresses as a maid. The background notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special figure or the decorative figure becomes a predetermined jackpot pattern, and a specific character (for example, a character such as a protagonist, a rare character, etc.) is specified. This is an effect that is displayed together with the background (for example, the background of the starry sky). The lamp notice is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special drawing or the decorative drawing becomes a predetermined jackpot symbol, and is a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the accessory lamp 9A). Is a production that lights up and blinks. In the lamp notice, any one of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, or a plurality of lamps may be turned on or blinking, or a lamp provided other than the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on or blinked. It may blink.

In stage A, a group notice (for example, a 6-person group notice or a boingo group notice) is executed after the reach line effect of the previous fluctuation. For example, when the 6-person group notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 83 (a19). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 74. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! An effect occurs that erases the character image of "!". Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is completed by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the 6-person group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to the display of the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a22), the notice of the 6-person group starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a23), the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), appears as the first (first) character in the first display period. The state shown in FIG. 84 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 47 (a), and while the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, has not yet been displayed, the maid A has not been displayed yet. It represents the first situation in which a part (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

During the execution of the 6-person group notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 52 to 58. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves. In addition, the meeting where the group notice production (6 people group notice, Baku Chu notice, Boingo notice described later) was executed, images other than the image related to the group notice production (for example, the background image and the image related to the SP reach first half notice production etc. ), The brightness is reduced. The brightness of the other images lowered during the group notice production gradually returns to the original brightness in the third display period. On the other hand, for the player, the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, the active display area 5A, and the like. The display of information on games that are of high importance regarding the outcome and advantage of the game is given a high priority so that the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 49, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first is said. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 84 (a24), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. The state shown in FIG. 84 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), and while the entire maid A initially displayed has not yet been displayed, a part of the maid A is partially displayed. While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) that was displayed more than the first situation and was displayed second was not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (a part of the face in this example) was displayed. It represents the second situation.

As shown in FIG. 85 (a25), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 85 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second appearing character skips the first appearing character. As shown in FIG. 85 (a27), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a28), the character continues to advance, and eventually the second appearing character running at the top (top) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86 (a29), the second appearing character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 86 (a30), the second appearing character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a31), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness according to the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a32) to 88 (a36), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed together with other characters. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 89 (a37), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 89 (a38), the frame lamp starts to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 89 (a38), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 89 (a39), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIGS. 90 (a40) and 90 (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 90 (a42), the group notice effect ends when the last character disappears.

Here, with reference to FIG. 91, a comparative example of the 6-person group notice and the 6-person group notice according to the present embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 91 (a201), as in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (a23), the entire maid A (Yumemu-chan), who is the main character, is not yet displayed, but the maid A is the same. This is the first situation in which a part of (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

After that, in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (a24), the entire maid A initially displayed is not yet displayed, while a part of the maid A is displayed more than in the first situation, and 2 While the entire maid B (Jam-chan) displayed second is not yet displayed, a part of the maid B (part of the face in this example) is displayed in the second situation. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 91 (a202), the maid A continues to run without the appearance of the second maid B, and the entire maid A is displayed. Then, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 91 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs on the left side of the center of the screen. In such a comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group notice effect.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 90, an animation in which a plurality of characters appear one after another without a gap and run through is displayed, so that the plurality of characters proceed as a group. By doing so, it is possible to create a powerful production. Further, since the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character, it is possible to prevent the group advance notice effect from becoming too complicated. The number of characters overtaking other characters may be larger than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

When the background notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 92 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a102), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, the image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the meter image, and the “PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (a103), as a background notice effect, a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed together with a specific background (in this example, the background of the starry sky). It is displayed on the screen of 5. Further, during the effect of the background notice, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the background notice.

When the lamp advance notice is executed after the reach line effect, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 93 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a112), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (a113), the lamp advance notice is executed, and a predetermined lamp (for example, the accessory lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on or blinks. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect of the lamp notice.

After the third display period of the group notice is completed as shown in FIG. 90 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 92 (a103) and the lamp notice shown in FIG. 93 (a113) are finished, FIGS. As shown in FIG. 98, the symbol feed effect is executed. In the decorative symbol in the reach mode, the symbol feed effect determines whether or not the decorative symbol being variablely displayed (in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C) is stopped, and the decorative symbol to be stopped. It is a production that encourages the player whether or not the symbol is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot symbol. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a43), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 94 (a44) to 95 (a48), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 96 (a49) to 97 (a54), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases, as shown in FIGS. 98 (a55) to (a57). As shown, finally, the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 98 (a57), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the symbol feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a58) and 99 (a59), the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" which has become the reach mode by the effect effect called whiteout. The color gradually becomes white, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which is the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (a59), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become white due to whiteout, is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

(Direction mode in the first half of SP reach)
The production mode in the first half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 108.

As shown in FIGS. 100 (a61) and 100 (a62), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 100 (a63), the title of SP reach is displayed. In this embodiment, as the SP reach effect, a maid character such as Yumemu-chan catches the Baku Chu, so the title "Catch the Baku Chu!" Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 101 (c1), when the production of the first half of the SP reach is executed, an image in which Maid A (Yumemu-chan) stands up is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (c2), an image in which the opponent's character (enemy character), Baku Chu, is surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 101 (c3) to 102 (c5), an animation is displayed in which the maid A chases the escaping explosive chew.

As shown in FIG. 102 (c6), after the animation in which the maid A jumps on the explosion chew is displayed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 103 (c11) at the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 9). However, at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 20), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. In the case of shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c31).

When the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 102 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 103 (c11). In the production shown in FIG. 103 (c11), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is a lost pattern "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (c12), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the loss mode is changed by the effect called blackout. As shown in FIG. 103 (c13), the image gradually becomes black, and finally the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are in the lost mode are completely invisible. ..

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104 (c14) and 104 (c15), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (c16), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 102 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 105 (c21). In the production shown in FIG. 105 (c21), an image in which the maid A catches the explosion chew and gives a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. 3 "stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 105 (c22), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" gradually expand gradually, and as shown in FIG. 105 (c23). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 106 (c24) and 106 (c25), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (c26), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 107 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 102 (c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c31). In the production shown in FIG. 108 (c31), an image in which the maid A is depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and the decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C is a lost pattern "4". "Stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (c32), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" in the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. Up to this point, the production is the same as when the SP reach is lost in the first half of the SP reach shown in FIGS. 103 (c11) and 103 (c12). However, as shown in FIG. 108 (c33), in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect of dropping the movable body 32, which did not occur when the loss occurs in the first half of the SP reach, is executed.

Then, in the case of shifting to the latter half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23) after the effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed, the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 109 (c41) and finally. In the case of shifting to reach (in the case of fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the transition is made to the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c71). In this way, the fluctuation pattern that becomes a big hit includes a fluctuation pattern that shifts to the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach by pretending that the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach. As a result, from the player's point of view, once the loss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, the player will shift to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach by relief, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Direction mode in the latter half of SP reach)
The production mode in the latter half of the SP reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 115.

When shifting to the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 108 (c33) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 109 (c41). In the effect shown in FIG. 109 (c41), the character image, the background image, and the like are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (c42), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the effect image of the latter half of the SP reach that has been switched on the back side appears. You will be able to see it. During the production of the latter half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP reach.

As shown in Fig. 109 (c42), when the production of the latter half of the SP reach is executed, Maid A (Yumemu-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) stand up and declare war on Baku Chu. The image is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 109 (c43) to 110 (c45), an animation is displayed in which the maid A and the maid B chase after the escaping explosion chew.

As shown in FIG. 109 (c46), after the animation that the maid A and the maid B jump on the explosion chew is displayed, the time of loss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 12) is shown in FIG. 111 (c51). When shifting to the production and at the time of a big hit (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 23), shifting to the production shown in FIG. 113 (c61) and shifting to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26). Shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c71).

When the loss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c51). In the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c51), an image in which Maid A and Maid B are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and a lost pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C. A certain "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (c52), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened by the blackout. As shown in FIG. 111 (c53), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c54) and 112 (c55), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side blackened by blackout is gradually increased, the transparency for the normal background that has been switched on the back side is gradually increased. The production image appears and becomes visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c56), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 113 (c61). In the production shown in FIG. 113 (c61), an image in which Maid A and Maid B catch the explosion chew and give a peace sign is displayed, and a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. "3" stops.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 113 (c62), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 113 (c63). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 114 (c64) and 114 (c65), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (c66), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 115 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in the final reach)
The production mode in the final reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 126.

When shifting to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 110 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c71). When shifting to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly turns black as shown in FIG. 116 (c71), and a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 116 (c72). Will be done. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (c73), the effect of notifying the start of the final reach is executed, the face image of the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) is displayed on the entire screen, and "Go! Character image is displayed. The effect display of the light as shown in FIG. 116 (c72) is the effect of the blackout shown in FIG. 116 (c71) and the effect of displaying the face image of the hero shown in FIG. 116 (c73). It is intentionally inserted in between. As a result, the effect shown in FIG. 116 (c72) can inform the player that the final reach will be achieved in an easy-to-understand manner.

After that, the production during the final reach is executed. During the production of the latter half of the final reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the final reach.

As shown in FIG. 117 (c74), an image in which the maid A gives a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 117 (c75) to 117 (c78), an image of one character is displayed at each of a plurality of timings, and an image of the entire sentence is displayed as shown in FIG. 117 (c79). By doing so, the theme of the production performed in the final reach is shown. In this example, it is shown as "all set".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 119 (c80) to 120 (c85), an animation in which the characters appearing in the final reach effect are introduced is displayed at each of a plurality of timings. For example, in this example, maid F, maid E, maid D, maid C, maid B, maid A, etc. appear in order from the supporting characters, and the main character has a high priority near the final (or the latter half). A character appears. In addition, characters with high priority such as the main character may appear in order. That is, it is preferable that a high-priority character such as a hero appears at the beginning (or the first half) or near the final (or the latter half) so as to stand out more than a low-priority character such as a supporting character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c86), when the final reach production is executed, an image is displayed in which the six characters who appeared in the notice of the six-person group stand up and declare war on Baku Chu. Will be done. After that, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c87) to 122 (c89), an animation is displayed in which six characters chase after the escaping Baku Chu.

As shown in FIG. 122 (c90), after an animation in which six characters drive the explosive chew is displayed, a trigger effect is executed as shown in FIG. 122 (c91). When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit during which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the characters "Close !!" are displayed. The image is displayed.

After the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 122 (c91), when the stick controller 31A is lost (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15), the effect shifts to the effect shown in FIG. (In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26) shifts to the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c111).

When the loss is confirmed in the final reach, the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is performed during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 122 (c91), and then the process proceeds to the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c101). In the effect shown in FIG. 123 (c101), an image in which six characters are depressed without being caught by the explosion chew is displayed, and a lost pattern is displayed as a decorative pattern located in the central decorative pattern display area 5C. "4" stops. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (c102), due to the blackout, the color of the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which became the lost mode is gradually blackened. As shown in FIG. 123 (c103), the character image and the image including the decorative patterns of "3", "4", and "3" which are finally lost are completely invisible.

After that, although not shown, if the transparency of the entire screen on the front side, which has become black due to blackout, is gradually increased, the effect image for the normal background that has been switched on the back side will appear. Become. Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the loss is confirmed.

When the big hit is confirmed in the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c91) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 124 (c111). In the production shown in FIG. 124 (c111), an image in which six characters are catching the explosion chew is displayed, and a big hit symbol "3" is displayed as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle. Stop.

After that, the fanfare production is executed. In the fanfare production, as shown in FIG. 124 (c112), the decorative patterns aligned with "3", "3", and "3" are gradually expanded, and as shown in FIG. 124 (c113). In addition, the decorative pattern is displayed so as to protrude from the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 125 (c114) and 125 (c115), an animation in which the decorative pattern moves is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (c116), the variable display of the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the variable display of the small symbol 5M is also completely stopped, so that the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 126 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yumemu-chan), is displayed in a large size, and an animation in which the characters "FEVER!" Flow is displayed.

(Direction mode in stage B)
The effect mode in the stage B will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 147.

As shown in FIG. 127 (b1), when the variable display is started based on one hold storage, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including an image of a character or a landscape is displayed as a background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image of Baku Chu is displayed as a character appearing in stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a mode corresponding to the variable display, and the effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a mode corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 127 (b2), when the character "x2" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and the second variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 127 (b3). The second variable display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 127 (b4), when the character "x3" indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect is further performed and the third variable display is performed is displayed, as shown in FIG. 128 (b5). The third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (b6), when "3" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and "3" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the variable display mode reaches. It becomes an aspect.

As shown in FIG. 129 (b7), a decorative symbol for a reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 129 (b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the reach line effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 59 to 65. The luminance data table shown in FIGS. 59 to 65 is the same as the luminance data table used in the reach line effect of the stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, the effect sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 129 (b9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen starts to rotate in the left-right direction, and the flash of light becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 130 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light becomes larger, and the reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a streak (light ray) of light connecting between the left and right decorative patterns constituting the reach mode, and is given a predetermined color such as blue or red. By displaying the reach line, it is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display mode has become the reach mode or the reach mode. The reach line appearing in the stage B may be the same as the reach line appearing in the stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, or the like, for example.

As shown in FIG. 130 (b11), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate in the left-right direction, the flash of light increases, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 130 (b12), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen returns to the original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen further extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 130, during the reach line effect, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 131 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 131 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further enlarged, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further extended in the left-right direction (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 131, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is gradually reduced in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 132 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen is further reduced, and the reach line in the center of the screen is further reduced in the left-right direction (inside) of the screen, and stops at a fixed position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit with high brightness. After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is also turned off.

After the reach line effect is completed as shown in FIG. 132 (b18), the symbol feed effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 133 to 137. During the symbol feed effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol feed effect based on the predetermined luminance data table. It should be noted that the effect sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the pattern feed effect.

As shown in FIG. 133 (b19), when the symbol feed effect is started, the decorative symbol in the variable display located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle is displayed in a large size, and a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed) is displayed. ) To start variable display. At this time, the symbol feed effect is started from the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (that is, the decorative symbol constituting the jackpot), which is the reach mode. Is a lower position away from the decorative pattern that is the reach mode.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 133 (b20) to 134 (b24), the decorative symbol in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slower speed). After that, as shown in FIGS. 135 (b25) to 136 (b30), the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases as the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed, and the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol increases, as shown in FIGS. 137 (b31) to (b33). As shown, finally, the decorative symbol in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (for example, a speed higher than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 137 (b33), when the decorative symbol in the center is variably displayed over two laps, the symbol feed effect ends.

After the pattern feed effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 138 (b34) and (b35), the color of the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which is the reach mode is gradually whitened by the whiteout. Eventually, the character image and the image including the decorative pattern of "3" which became the reach mode are completely invisible. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (b36), when the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has become white due to whiteout is gradually increased, the effect image for post-variation that has been switched on the back side is displayed on the screen. Appears on.

As shown in FIGS. 139 (b37) and 139 (b38), after shifting to the post-variation, the animation of the character is displayed until the title image of the SP reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as a hero, or may be a character appearing in SP reach. As shown in FIG. 139 (b39), the title of SP reach (“Catch Baku Chu!”) Is displayed. During the production of the first half of the SP reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach based on the predetermined luminance data table. The production sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, a bomb chew notice or a boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach of the post-variation is being displayed. For example, when the Baku Chu Mondai notice is executed during the period when the title of the first half of the SP reach is displayed, the PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 140 (b40). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the pressing operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed. Will be done. Further, during the PUSH effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect based on the luminance data table shown in FIG. 74. For example, during the PUSH effect, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or blinking. During the PUSH effect, a sound effect may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R to urge the player to press the push button 31B. As described above, in the PUSH effect, the player is urged to press the push button 31B by displaying an image, lighting or blinking a lamp, or by sound.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an image showing the push button 31B displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a meter image, and "PUSH! The text image of "!" Disappears. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. By outputting the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B could be effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends by the time the group notice effect (in this example, the explosion chew group notice) starts. Further, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the button pressing. In this example, all the frame lamps are lit with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 once returns to the display of the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or blinks in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b43), the Baku Chu Mondai notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b44), the first (first) character appears in the first display period. In the state shown in FIG. 141 (b44), the entire character displayed first (first) is not yet displayed, but a part of the character displayed first (in this example, a part of the face). ) Is displayed, indicating the first situation.

While the Baku Chu Mondai notice is being executed, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 52 to 58. For example, in the first display period shown in FIGS. 141 to 143, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light with high brightness, and then in the direction in which the character advances. At the same time, the part of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves.

During the group notice effect, the effect sound corresponding to the group advance notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As for the volume of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, as shown in FIG. 49, the output of the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect is started at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the first is said. The volume of the effect sound is raised to a specific volume in the display period, the volume of the effect sound is maintained at the specific volume in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is decreased in the third display period. When the group notice effect starts, a start sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the effect sound corresponding to the group notice effect, but the second character appears. By then, the output of the start sound will stop.

As shown in FIG. 141 (b45), a second character appears shortly after the first character appears. In the state shown in FIG. 141 (b45), while the entire character displayed first is not yet displayed, a part of the character displayed first is displayed more than in the first situation, and the second character is displayed. It represents the second situation in which the entire character displayed in is not yet displayed, while a part of the second displayed character (a part of the face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 142 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. The display area on the screen used in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of "Catch Baku Chu!" In the SP first half title notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b49), the character continues to advance, and eventually the first displayed character running at the top (top) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b50), the first displayed character running at the top (top) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b51), the first displayed character running at the top disappears first from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b52), in the second display period, characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed. In the second display period shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the frame lamps are sparsely turned on with high brightness in accordance with the appearance of the characters traveling in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through. After that, as shown in FIGS. 144 (b52) to 145 (b57), characters appear one after another, and an animation of running through from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed.

As the characters run from the left side to the right side of the screen as a group, the characters cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display of "Catch the Baku Chu!". ..

As shown in FIG. 146 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears, and an animation of running from the left side to the right side of the screen is displayed together with other characters. No new character will appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the frame lamp is also turned off or low from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the effect that the character disappears to the left edge of the screen in the group notice. The position where the light is turned on by the brightness will be changed. As shown in FIG. 146 (b58), when the third display period is entered, all of the game effect lamps 9 are once turned on with high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b59), the frame lamp starts to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 146 (b59), since the character is not displayed in the right half area of the screen, a part of the frame right lamp 9R is turned off. As shown in FIG. 146 (b60), the number of frame right lamps 9R that are turned off increases as the character disappears toward the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 146, as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!" Reappears step by step. At this time, if the SP first half title notice lottery is won, the SP first half title notice is given by changing the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display of "Catch Baku Chu!". .. For example, as shown in FIG. 139 (b39), before the Baku Chu group notice is executed, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display in the first half of the SP reach are white, but FIG. 145 (b56). After that, when the character image in the group notice is displayed on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the title is displayed, the title display becomes difficult to see or disappears. While the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice, the characters "Catch the Baku Chu!" In the title display change to red, and as shown in FIGS. 146 (b59) and (b60), the character in the group notice. Disappears to the left edge of the screen, and the red title display gradually appears and becomes visible.

As shown in FIGS. 147 (b61) and (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 to be turned off increases as the character gradually disappears. As shown in FIG. 147 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group notice effect ends. After that, the process shifts to the production of the first half of the SP reach shown in FIG. 101 (c1).

(Boingo group notice)
The production mode of the Boingo group notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 to 157.

In the above-mentioned 6-person group notice and Baku Chu group notice, a plurality of characters proceed as a group from the right end to the left end of the screen. As described above, the 6-person group notice and the Baku Chu group notice were the effects of the character advancing in the X-axis direction in the XY plane shown in FIG. 40. On the other hand, in the Boingo group notice, the character (Boingo) can also move in the Z-axis direction of the screen. That is, the Boingo group notice is a 3D effect in which the character progresses in the three-dimensional space of XYZ.

FIGS. 148 to 153 are diagrams for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice is executed in the stage A. Even when the Boingo group is executed in the stage B, it is the same as the effect mode shown in FIGS. 148 to 153. Further, although not shown, the Boingo group notice effect also has a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period, as in the case of the 6-person group notice effect and the Baku Chu group notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 148 (d1), the boingo group notice starts, but the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off before the character appears. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect will be executed from now on.

While the Boingo group notice is being executed, for example, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the group notice effect based on the luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 52 to 58. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the place where the character appears in the group notice starts to light up with high brightness, and then the place of the lamp that lights up with high brightness moves according to the direction in which the character travels. In addition, the frame lamps are sparsely lit with high brightness according to how the characters progress in a group in the group notice effect. As a result, the frame lamp lights up or blinks according to the animation display in which the characters form a group and run through. Further, the effect sound corresponding to the group notice output from the speakers 8L and 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display in which the character runs through.

As shown in FIG. 148 (d2), a pre-stage image by a light effect is displayed as a pre-stage effect before a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is the group appearance point where the character group appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (d3), the first character appears from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the previous image due to the light effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 149 (d4) and 149 (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 149 (d6), as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 150 (d7) to (d9), the characters form a group and proceed from the depth side to the front side of the screen, so that the entire screen is covered by the characters. As shown in FIGS. 151 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and progresses from the depth side to the front side of the screen.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 152 (d13) and 152 (d14), as the last character advances from the depth side to the front side of the screen, it covers most of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 152 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed from one end to the other end of the screen over a range, and the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 153 (d16) and 153 (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), when the last character disappears. The group notice production ends.

FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo group notice. FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (F) correspond to FIGS. 148 (d3) to 149 (d6), 150 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 154 (A), the first character appears from the group appearance point, and as shown in FIGS. 154 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group appearance point. Here, as the first displayed character (first character) is enlarged and displayed, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult or invisible to be visually recognized by the first character. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 154 (E) and 154 (F), even if the succeeding character image is placed at the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized, so that the succeeding character image must be placed. May be good.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, a comparative example of the Boingo group notice and the Boingo group notice according to the present embodiment are compared. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 155, the character (boingo) appears at a specific position (group appearance point) on the screen, but the previous image due to the light effect as shown in FIG. 148 (d2) is not displayed. Therefore, in order to eliminate the discomfort that the character suddenly appears large, it is necessary to create an animation so that the character is displayed small and gradually enlarged as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156. ..

Therefore, in the comparative example, the animation display as shown in FIGS. 155 (d101) to 156 (d105) is displayed until the character can be displayed in the size shown in FIG. 148 (d3) as shown in FIG. 156 (d106). You have to go through it, which takes extra time to produce, and you have to create an image for animation. On the other hand, in the case of the picture form of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 148 (d2) and 148 (d3), the pre-stage image by the light effect is displayed as the pre-stage effect before the character appears. By displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image by the effect, the character can be displayed from the beginning with a certain size (the size shown in FIG. 148 (d3) and FIG. 156 (d106)). It can be displayed.

(Modified example of Boingo group notice)
FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining an effect mode when the Boingo group notice according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 157 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 153. For example, as shown in FIGS. 157 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 157 (d103). As such, the normal background image may be switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. In this way, the group notice effect may be executed during the execution of the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the Boingo group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 147. Further, instead of covering the entire screen by enlarging the last character, the background image used for the group notice effect may be switched to the next effect by an animation wound like a scroll.

(Dog herd notice)
A mode of producing the dog herd notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 160.

In the present embodiment, the 6-person group notice, the bomb chew notice, and the boingo group notice are exemplified as the group notice effect, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is referred to as a dog group notice as shown in FIGS. 158 to 160. It may be the one that executes the group notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158 (e1), the first character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 158 (e2), a plurality of dog characters appear one after another, and FIG. 158 (e3). The screen area may be covered with a group of characters as shown in.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 159 (e4) to 159 (e6), the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 158 (e3), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group notice effect in the layer on the front side of the layer on which the normal background image is displayed, it is shown in FIG. 159 (e6). As such, the normal background image is switched to the title image in the first half of the SP. Then, on the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP corresponding to the subsequent production of the first half of the SP reach is displayed.

Further, the title image of the first half of the SP in the dog group notice may give a notice of a big hit by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 147.

As shown in FIG. 160, when the 6-person notice and the dog group notice are compared, the distance between the first displayed character and the last displayed character in the dog group notice (the length between them on the X-axis). S) X2 is shorter than the distance (length between the two on the X-axis) X1 between the character displayed first and the character displayed last in the 6-person group notice. Further, since the execution time is the same or substantially the same for both, the speed V2 at which the character advances in the dog group notice is slower than the speed V1 at which the character advances in the six-person group notice. Further, the density D2 of the plurality of characters in the dog group notice is larger than the density D1 of the plurality of characters in the six-person group notice. In addition, the dog group notice production has a higher expectation (reliability) of a big hit than the 6-person group notice production, and the dog group notice production has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the 6-person group notice production.

(Execution of group notice production during reach line production)
With reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, an effect mode when the group notice effect is executed during the reach line will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 161 (f1), in a state where the reach line effect is executed, the group notice effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 161 (f2) to (f4), and then FIGS. 162 (f5) and (f6). ) May be executed.

[Main configurations and effects]
The technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. People group notice production) and
A process of executing a blessing effect executing means (for example, a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a blessing effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. ) And, with
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect (for example, the fanfare effect shown in FIGS. 105 to 107 is executed after the 6-person group notice effect shown in FIGS. 84 to 90 is executed).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variation number 9), the variable display is started after the variable display is started. In the first predetermined period (for example, the period of T1 + T2 shown in FIG. 50) until it is suggested that the display is the result of the loss display, the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).
When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable pattern of the variable numbers 20, 23, 26), the variable display is displayed after the variable display is started. In the second predetermined period (for example, the period of T3 + T4, the period of T5 + T6, the period of T7 + T8) until it is suggested that the specific display result is obtained, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first display period. Starts (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, the feeling of exhilaration may diminish with the passage of time until the result of the variable display is finalized, but in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, it is in the latter half of the time of the variable display. By executing the group notice effect, it is possible to maintain the feeling of exhilaration and evoke it again. On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the fanfare effect, which is a blessing effect, is executed. After that, even if the feeling of exhilaration diminishes with the passage of time, the feeling of exhilaration can be maintained or evoked again by the blessing effect.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. That is, the specific display result is a display result for controlling the gaming state to an advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the lighting corresponding to the big hit occurs. The combination of embodiments is the specific display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit, the big hit occurs, and the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit is specified. It will be the display result. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol (for example, a big hit such as "3,3,3" or "7,7,7". A big hit occurs when the game is stopped as a combination of symbols), and the display of the specific special symbol is the specific display result.

The "loss display result" is a display result different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. That is, the loss display result is a display result in which the gaming state is not controlled to the advantageous state even if it is derived. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the loss occurs. The combination of the corresponding lighting modes results in a loss display result. Further, when the combination of the lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 becomes the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the lighting mode corresponding to the loss. The combination will be the result of the loss display. Further, the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific predetermined symbol (for example, a combination of lost symbols such as "3, 2, 3") and stops. Occasionally, the result of the game becomes a loss, and the display of the predetermined symbol becomes a loss display result.

The "advantageous state" is a state advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state in which the value-adding rate for games (for example, the payout rate of a game ball) is 1 or more or more than 1 by being controlled. In the present embodiment, as an advantageous state, a big hit gaming state controlled when each of the normal big hits 1 and 2 and the probability variation big hits 1 to 9 occurs is exemplified. The advantageous state may be a small hit gaming state controlled when a small hit occurs, or may be a probabilistic change state or a time saving state.

The "new character display" may be a character of the same type as the character initially displayed in the group notice effect, or may be a character of a different type from the character initially displayed in the group notice effect. good.

The "blessing effect" is an effect of displaying an image congratulating that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display having become a specific display result. It is also a production that displays an image that congratulates you. "Blessing" includes suggesting or notifying the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to an advantageous state. In addition, "blessing" improves the player's expectation for the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or is controlled to the advantageous state. Including letting you do it. For example, in the blessing effect, the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and the special figure 2 variable display unit of the special figure LED board 20. The combination of lighting modes in 22 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, or the decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 is a specific special symbol ( It includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that the game has become a big hit symbol) or that the player is controlled to the big hit game state.

"The blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" means that the group notice effect is executed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1, and then the blessing is performed in the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. Including that the production is performed. In addition, "the blessing effect can be executed after the group effect" indicates that the display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is the specific display result of the variable display based on the hold memory of 1. When the group notice effect is executed as a look-ahead effect that suggests or gives a notice before the display result is started, the group notice effect is executed, and then the variable display based on the hold memory of the 1 is started and the 1 Includes the execution of a blessing effect within a variable display based on the hold memory of.

The "first predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a lost display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 50 and 51. It is exemplified by the period of T1 + T2 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a loss display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the loss. , The combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the big hit in the special drawing 2 variable display unit 22 of the special drawing LED board 20 is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the loss, and the decorative symbol display area of the image display device 5. This includes stopping the decorative symbol that is variably displayed in 5L, 5C, and 5R as a specific predetermined symbol (missing symbol combination). Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the loss display result because the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

The "second predetermined period" is a period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and in the present embodiment, FIGS. 50 and 51. It is exemplified by the period of T3 + T4, the period of T5 + T6, and the period of T7 + T8 shown in. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" means that the combination of lighting modes in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit. , The combination of lighting modes in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a big hit, and variable display is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. Includes that the decorative symbol that is being displayed becomes a specific special symbol (big hit symbol combination) and stops. Further, when the movable body 32 does not operate at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a lost display result, while the movable body 32 operates at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display becomes a hit display result. , "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result" suggests to the player that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result by the operation of the movable body 32 at the specific timing. Including notifying. It should be noted that the specific timing is the timing at which the movable body 32 operates at the time of a big hit by performing an effect of urging the player to operate the operation means such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and by operating the operation means by the player. You may.

(1-2) The second display period is a period longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is a longer period than the first display period. (For example, each display period shown in FIG. 49).

From this, the group notice effect can be made powerful by setting the second display period in which the characters appear one after another in the group notice effect to be the longest period. Furthermore, by setting the first display period from the first appearance of the character to the first departure of the character as the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the suddenly executed group notice effect from becoming full. Can be done.

(1-3) The character displayed first in the first display period is a character having a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume-chan, who is the main character).

As a result, the character that first appears in the group notice production is a character with a high priority like the main character, which is familiar to the player, but after that, a character that appears less frequently than the main character in other productions. By appearing in the group notice production, it is possible to surprise the player about the group notice production and make the player feel that it is a rare production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "high-priority character" includes the main character appearing in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the character having the highest priority among the characters other than the main character, and is executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 more than other characters. Includes characters that appear frequently (number of times) in the production to be performed.

(1-4) When it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the character is displayed in the group effect. Is first started at a timing close to half of the second predetermined period in the first half of the second predetermined period (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group notice effect is executed in the vicinity of the latter half of the first half. So, the afterglow of the group notice production can be extended to the later side as much as possible.

(1-5) As for the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 20, 23, 26), the display result of the variable display is the loss display result. After pretending to be, the variable display result includes a relief pattern (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation numbers 23 and 26) that becomes the specific display result.
Also in the relief pattern, in the second predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the specific display result, the first half of the second predetermined period is the first. 1 The display period begins (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 50 and 51).

As a result, even in the case of a relief pattern in which the display result of the variable display is a hit display result after the display result of the variable display is pretended to be a lost display result, the fanfare effect which is a blessing effect is executed. , The group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time to give an uplifting feeling, and even if the uplifting feeling diminishes with the passage of time, the blessing effect keeps the uplifting feeling or evokes it again. Can be done.

(1-6) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. With the pattern suggested to be (for example, the variation pattern of the main variation numbers 20, 23, 26), until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. A common display is made (eg, the example shown in FIGS. 77-126).

As a result, for example, the variation pattern of variation number 9 and the variation pattern of variation number 20 are executed in common until the display result is finalized, and the variation pattern of variation number 12 and the variation pattern of variation number 23 are displayed. The common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed, and the common effect is executed until the display result is confirmed between the variation pattern of the variation number 15 and the variation pattern of the variation number 26. Therefore, the common effect is executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the player is in the middle of the game.

It should be noted that the pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation numbers 9, 12, 15) and the display result of the variable display are the specific display results. (For example, the fluctuation patterns of the main fluctuation numbers 20, 23, and 26) are different from each other until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the loss display result or the specific display result. May be done.

As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect is executed while the effects different from each other are being executed.

(1-7) A notice effect for notifying that the execution period of the group effect and the display result of the variable display, which is different from the group notice, will be the specific display result (for example, the SP first half title notice effect). May overlap with the execution period of
The notice effect ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group effect has a larger display area than the display in the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 141 to 147).

As a result, even if the group notice effect is executed while the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the SP first half title advance notice effect can be shown to the player.

(1-8) While the advance notice effect is being executed, the group effect is executed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 141 to 147).

As a result, when the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect is being executed, the player can pay attention to the execution of the group advance notice effect. It should be noted that the advance notice effect such as the SP first half title advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect do not start at the same time.

(1-9) When the group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the notice effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20). , The group notice is more reliable than the SP first half title notice).

As a result, other notice effects with a lower expectation of a big hit than the group notice effect are not displayed on the front layer having a higher priority than the group notice effect, so that the big hit is suitable for the player. Can be suggested. As described above, in the present embodiment, the production having a high expectation of a big hit is not covered with the production having a low expectation on the front side.

(1-12) During the execution of the group effect, the brightness is reduced in both the background display and the display in the advance notice effect, while the display of information related to the game (for example, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory). The brightness does not decrease in the fourth symbol 5J and the small symbol 5M indicating the number, the first reserved storage display area 5D, the second reserved storage display area 5U, and the active display area 5A).

As a result, when the group notice effect is executed, the brightness of the image related to the background display and other notice effects (for example, the image related to the SP first half title notice effect having a lower expectation than the group notice effect) is lowered, while the game is played. It is important for the player as much as possible because the display of information about the game, which is highly important for the player regarding the victory or defeat of the game and the advantage, is given a high priority, and the brightness is not lowered even if the group notice effect is executed. Information can be shown.

(2-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 47 and 84).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, it is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is a group notice production and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear. can.

In the "first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed", as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the entire character initially displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is still present. While not displayed, a situation in which a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the game machine frame 3 displays an image. In the display area visible to the player in the state of covering the screen of the device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while the character is at the edge of the display area visible to the player. Includes situations where part of is displayed. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which the first appearing character is completely invisible, but a part of the first appearing character is visible.

"The second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed" is shown in FIG. 47 (b). As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 as compared with the first situation. And while the entire second displayed character has not yet been displayed, a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or FIG. 84 (b). As shown in the above, in the display area visible to the player when the game machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, the entire character initially displayed is not yet displayed. At the edge of the display area visible to the player, a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation, and the entire character displayed second is not yet displayed, while the character is visible to the player. Includes a situation where a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area. That is, the second situation includes a situation in which a second character appears after the first appearing character before the first appearing character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group effect, the first displayed character and the second displayed character have different Y-axis position coordinates along the vertical direction on the screen.

As a result, since the first character and the second character do not overlap on the Y axis, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character appears.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is performed on the display of characters in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 45).

This has the effect of making each character appear to be a plurality of characters, so that it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that only one character will appear.

(2-4) The sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output during the display of the character displayed first in the group effect, but by the time the display of the character displayed second is started. Finish (for example, the example shown in FIG. 84).

As a result, a sound suggesting the start of the group notice effect is output and the first character appears, so that the player can be notified that the group notice effect has been executed, while the second character By the end of the start sound by the time it appears, it is possible to suitably provide a group notice effect.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but it ends by the time the second character appears. ..

(2-5) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character in which the whole body is displayed in the display area of the screen and a character in which a part of the whole body does not fit in the display area of the screen. Part includes a character that fits and is displayed in the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 43).

As a result, more characters can appear in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a first character (for example, maid A) and a second character (for example, maid B) whose type is different from that of the first character. ,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the first character displayed in which the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and a part of the whole body are displayed in the display area of the screen. The other part of the whole body is displayed in a mixed manner with the first character displayed in the display area of the screen without being fitted (for example, the example shown in FIG. 43).

This makes it possible to give the illusion that more types of characters are appearing in the group notice effect in the display area where the area is limited.

(2-7) A shield (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) covers a part of the screen, and the character displayed first in the group effect is displayed at the position where the shield covers. Is started, and then the display of the second displayed character is started.
Even when the screen is visually recognized with the shield covered, the first situation changes to the second situation in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 47).

As a result, even in the display area of the screen actually viewed by the player, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice production, so there is a question as to whether or not it is a group notice production, and only one person appears. It is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that it may be.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is visually recognized from the side toward the screen and the shield, it is possible to visually recognize the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 47).

As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and visually recognizes the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group notice effect, so that the group notice effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the question of whether or not it is the case and the misunderstanding that only one person will appear.

(2-9) At the design stage, a display relating to the group effect is created with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the shield on a screen of a predetermined size, and further, the predetermined size of the screen (for example, for example). A display relating to the group effect is created up to the area corresponding to the large size so that it can be applied to a size larger than 19 inches (for example, 20 inches).

As a result, even when the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed so as to use a size larger than a predetermined size, the created group notice effect data can be applied.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect are a low importance character (for example, maids C to F) having a low importance in the content of the gaming machine, and the low importance character. Including high-importance characters (for example, maids A and B) that are highly important in the contents of the gaming machine.
The high-severity character has a lower proportion than the low-severity character in that the face does not fit in the display area of the screen and the part other than the face of the whole body fits in the display area of the screen and is displayed (for example, the figure). Example shown in 43).

As a result, a character with high importance such as the main character can easily recognize the face in the group notice production as compared with a character with low importance such as a supporting character, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(3-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the group notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing the effect is provided.
The effect executed by the effect executing means includes a group effect (for example, a group notice effect shown in FIGS. 84 to 90) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, in the group notice production, the largest number of characters appear in all the productions, so that the player can be made aware that the variable display that can be expected to be a big hit is performed.

"The group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is 1 among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects executed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, 1 The effect with the largest number of characters displayed on the screen includes the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect having the largest number of characters displayed on one screen includes the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is described in all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is a decoration among all the effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Among the effects performed during the period when the variable display based on the hold memory of 1 is performed, such as the effect at the time of variable display of the symbol, the effect at the time of reach, the effect at the time of pseudo-continuous effect, and the effect at the time of big hit occurrence, the effect is concerned. The effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens is the largest is included in the group notice effect. Further, "the group effect is an effect in which the number of displayed characters is the largest among the effects that can be executed by the effect execution means" is executed during the big hit game state and the subsequent probable change state and time saving state. Among the effects, the effect in which the total number of characters displayed on all the screens during the effect is the largest is the group notice effect. In the above-mentioned example, the group notice effect does not have to be the effect with the largest number of displayed character types.

(3-2) An effect in which the number of characters displayed is smaller than that of the group effect, and a specific effect in which a plurality of characters are displayed (for example, an effect of the latter half of the SP reach or an effect of the final reach) is executed.

As a result, various effects can be executed, and among them, the largest number of characters can appear in the group notice effect.

It should be noted that the specific effect may be an effect in which the number of displayed character types is larger than that of the group notice effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed in the second display period of the group effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the specific effect.

As a result, it is possible to show the player a powerful effect in the second display period, which is the longest period among the group notice effects.

The number of character types displayed in the second display period of the group notice effect may be larger than the number of character types displayed in the specific effect.

(4-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
In the group production,
An auxiliary display is made to show that the character is in progress,
When the display of the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the first character has priority over the display of the second character, while the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character is used. When the display of the second character overlaps with the display of the second character, the display of the second character has priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 44).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, while it is possible to show the player a more dynamic group notice effect by displaying the auxiliary display on the character, the auxiliary display does not hinder the visibility of other characters, so that more characters can be displayed. It can be clearly shown to the player.

The "auxiliary display" may be any display indicating that the character is progressing, and for example, an image display emphasizing that the character is progressing as shown in FIG. 44 (as shown in FIG. 44). For example, it may be an image display of sand smoke (an image display of sand smoke), an image display showing traces of passage of a character (for example, an image display of a character's footprint), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example). , An image display representing the aura of the character). The "auxiliary display" may be an image display performed in the vicinity of the character in relation to the progress of the character.

(4-2) The layer displayed on the screen is different between the display of the character in the group effect and the auxiliary display in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, the image of sand smoke is layer 1 and the character. The image of is placed in the layers after layer 2).

As a result, the character image and the auxiliary display can be preferably shown to the player in the group notice effect.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10).
The moving image data corresponding to the group effect includes the first character data (for example, the moving image data of the character C of the layer 9) and the second character data (for example, the character C of the layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type. Video data) including
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values relating to the movement speed of the character, while the animation parameter values relating to the movement of the character are the same.

As a result, even when the movement speed of the character is changed, the work process related to the design of the group notice effect can be reduced by sharing the animation parameter values related to the movement of the character.

(4-4) In the group effect, a plurality of characters are not arranged at the same timing and the same speed at the coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 42).

As a result, since a plurality of characters do not operate in the same position at the same position, the group notice effect can be preferably shown to the player.

(5-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, the display of the newly displayed character (for example, the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (for example, FIG. 85, FIG. Example shown in 86).

The "newly displayed character" may be the character that appeared second in the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, or the character that appeared third or later in the group notice effect. You may. Considering that the group notice effect is an effect in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, the character that appears second in the group notice effect is displayed first as the "newly displayed character". It is preferable that the character that appears immediately after the second appearance overtakes the character that is displayed first because of a sense of dynamism and presence.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the character that appears second is overtaken by the character that appears first and disappears at the top as it is, it is possible to show the player a lively group notice effect.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group effect include a character that overtakes another character.
The number of overtaken characters is either greater or less than the number of other characters overtaken by the overtaken character.

As a result, the group notice effect can be prevented from becoming too complicated, and the group notice effect with a lively feeling can be shown to the player. Can be shown to.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is more than the outline of the other character. Is also displayed thick (for example, the example shown in FIG. 46).

As a result, it is possible to show the player how the character overtakes another character in an easy-to-understand manner.

(6-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. People group notice production) and
Execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the push effect) for displaying the suggestion image (for example, the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the character image of "PUSH !!") suggesting the execution of the group effect. Means (for example, a process of executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) are provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
The display of the suggestion image ends by the start of the first display period in the group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 83).

The "suggestion image" may be any image as long as it suggests the execution of the group notice effect, or may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means as shown in FIG. 83. , It may be an effect image such as a light or a pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of the group notice effect, or it may be a clock image in a timer effect that measures the time until the group notice effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be a character image (for example, a character image of "group") suggesting the execution of the group notice effect. In the timer effect, the time until the group notice effect is executed by the clock image is timed, and when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, a character image suggesting the execution of the group notice effect (character of "group"). The image) may be displayed.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestion image (for example, the effect indicating that the push button 31B has been pressed) is finished, the display of the character is first started in the first display period (for example,). Example shown in FIG. 83).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-3) The suggestion image includes an image prompting the player to operate the operating means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a character image of "PUSH !!").
The output of the sound (for example, PUSH sound) when the operating means is operated during the display of the suggested image ends by the time when the display of the character first starts in the first display period (for example, FIG. 83). Example shown in).

This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the appearance of the character first.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestion image is being displayed, any one of a plurality of effects including the group effect (for example, 6-person group notice, background notice, lamp notice) is executed. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 83, 92, and 93).

As a result, a plurality of effects are executed with the operation by the player as a turning point, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(7-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. It is equipped with a crowd notice production and a dog group notice production shown in FIGS. 158 to 160).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
The group effect includes a first group effect (for example, a 6-person group notice effect) and a second group effect (for example, a dog group notice effect).
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect proceed at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1), respectively.
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect each proceed at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2).
The first speed is faster than the second speed,
The first group effect is configured so that the linear distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character is longer than that of the second group effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 160). ..

As shown in FIG. 160, the "straight line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is displayed first in the group notice effect such as the 6-person group notice effect and the dog group notice effect. It is a linear distance (X-axis distance) from the end of the character to the end of the character displayed last. This linear distance is set to time T, where T is the time from the display of the first character to the display of the last character from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and V is the speed of each character. It can be calculated by multiplying the velocity V (T × V).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, it is possible to preferably show the player two types of group notice effects.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group effect (for example, X1 / V1) is the same as or substantially the same as the execution time of the second group effect (for example, X2 / V2) (for example, in FIG. 160). Example shown).

This makes it possible to execute two types of group notice effects using the same or substantially the same time.

(7-3) When the second group effect is executed, there is a higher probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result than when the first group effect is executed.
The execution probability of the second group effect is lower than the execution probability of the first group effect.

As a result, for the dog group notice effect, which has a lower execution probability than the 6-person group notice and has a high expectation, the speed of the character is made slower than the 6-person group notice, so that, for example, the player shoots the character of the dog group notice effect. You can increase the chances of doing it.

(7-4) The degree to which the plurality of characters displayed in the second group effect are dense (for example, the degree of density D2) is the degree to which the plurality of characters displayed in the first group effect are dense (for example, dense). Greater than degree D1).

As a result, the characters are arranged at an appropriate density in consideration of the speed and the moving distance of the characters in the group notice effect, so that it is possible to provide a group notice effect suitable for the player.

(7-5) In the second group effect, a plurality of characters located at the tail end are arranged from the lower part to the upper part of the screen.
On the screen after the plurality of characters located at the end have passed, the display corresponding to the subsequent effect is performed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 159).

As a result, it is possible to switch to an image for the next production and show it to the player at the opportunity of the group notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(8-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37, Boingo shown in FIGS. 148 to 157) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group. With group notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, the display of the character is started from a specific position so that the character advances from the back side to the front side on the screen.
At the timing related to the first start of the display of the character at the specific position, the front-stage display (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect) that makes the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see is performed (for example, the display of the front-stage image by a light effect). , The example shown in FIG. 148).

The "previous stage display" may be any display as long as it makes the display of the character difficult to see, and is a display that hides a specific position where the character appears (for example, display of an effect image such as light or a pattern). Etc.). "Difficult to see" means that the player cannot completely see the specific position, the player can see the specific position but the specific position is difficult to see, and the player can see the specific position but the character can see the character from the specific position. This includes a state in which the appearance cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the player can visually recognize the specific position and the appearance of the character from the specific position can be visually recognized, but the visual recognition is difficult.

The "timing related to the first start of the character display at a specific position" is the same timing as the first start of the character display at the specific position, or the timing when the character display first starts at the specific position. A timing within a predetermined period before and after (this predetermined period is a period during which the player thinks that the display of the character first starts at a specific position) is included.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, since the first character is displayed from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the previous image, it is possible to display the character from the beginning with a certain size, and suddenly a large character is displayed. Does not cause the player.

(8-2) In the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to proceed from the depth direction to the front direction on the screen.
The enlarged display makes it difficult to visually recognize the character at the specific position (example shown in FIG. 154).

This makes it possible to give a visual effect as if a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position with a certain depth.

(8-3) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end (example shown in FIG. 152). ..

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) The background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display corresponding to the subsequent effect in conjunction with the movement of the character displayed last in the group effect (for example, FIG. 152). , Example shown in FIG. 153).

As a result, it is possible to suitably switch to the effect after the group notice effect by using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character displayed last in the group effect is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end facing the one end.
On the back side of the character displayed last, other characters in the group effect are not displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 154).

As a result, even if the succeeding character image is placed in the position hidden by the first character, it cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is not necessary to place the succeeding character image, and a plurality of characters appear one after another from a position having a depth. It is possible to give a visual effect as if it appeared.

(9-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. People group notice production) and
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
The sound output means starts outputting the effect sound corresponding to the group effect at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to the volume in the subsequent first display period. A specific volume higher than the predetermined volume is set, the volume of the effect sound is set to the specific volume even in the second display period, and the volume of the effect sound is set to a volume lower than the specific volume in the third display period. The production sound is output.

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. In addition, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at a specific volume even during the second display period, it is possible to liven up the group notice production at a specific volume even before the second display period. It can improve the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled so that the sound output means raises or lowers the volume, or the volume control of the sound output means is constant, but raising or lowering the volume is specified in the sound data referred to by the sound output means. It may be something that raises or lowers the volume.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the effect sound is output in the first display period until the volume of the effect sound rises to a specific volume starts to decrease in the volume of the effect sound in the third display period. It is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the effect sound disappears (for example, the example shown in FIG. 49).

As a result, the sound output in the group notice effect is performed in a shorter time for the fade-in, and the fade-out is performed in a longer time than the fade-in, so that the sound of the group notice effect can be suitably output.

(10-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. People group notice production) and
It is equipped with a plurality of lighting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9 such as a frame lamp).
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
The luminance data table composed of the plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means is the first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period (for example, the frame lamp shown in FIG. 54 (a)). The grandchild table W1), the second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 54B), and the third luminance corresponding to the third display period. A data table (for example, a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 54 (c)) is included.
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is a first luminance data in which data for lighting the lighting means with low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance are combined. The combination of the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness is composed of the second brightness data different from the first brightness data (for example, FIG. Example of grandchild table for frame lamp shown in 54),
The second luminance data table is set to light more of the lighting means with higher luminance than the first luminance data table (for example, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is a frame lamp grandchild table W1). High brightness (“0” to “F”) data is stored in more lamps).

As a result, in the group notice effect, the second display period in which the characters appear one after another and progresses is longer than the first display period from the first start of the character display to the first end of the character display. By designing it to be long, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect. Further, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp with higher brightness than the first brightness data table, so that the first display period In, it is possible to express a weak footstep when multiple characters appear, and in the second display period, it is possible to express a strong footstep when multiple characters appear one after another, and a more suitable group notice effect is given to the player. Can be provided.

"Data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness" are a plurality of lighting units included in each lighting means (for example, RGB in the frame left lamp 9L1). It is lighting data (lighting element) for each time in WWW in the upper lamp 9C. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 54 (a), the data (100) of the frame left lamp 9L1 (RGB) in T1-1. be. As the RGB data, the data corresponding to the extinguishing is "000", the data corresponding to the low-luminance lighting is "100", and the data corresponding to the high-luminance lighting is "F00".

The "brightness data" is lighting data for each time in each lighting means (for example, a frame lamp, a board lamp 9C), and is "data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness" or "high brightness of the lighting means". It is a collection of "data for lighting in" for each time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 54 (a), it is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in T1-1.

The luminance data table is a collection of "luminance data" in a predetermined period (for example, the lighting time specified by the parent table or the child table). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 54 (a), T1-1 to T1- It is the data of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R in 11.

(10-2) The first luminance data table has a longer luminance data switching interval than the second luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals. , The grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp is switched at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that the character is running faster than in the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(10-3) In the first luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are evenly spaced, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data switching intervals are not evenly spaced (for example, shown in FIG. 53). As described above, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is switched at 100 msec intervals, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is switched at 50-80 msec intervals).

Thereby, in the second display period, it can be expressed that a plurality of characters are running out of step with each other as compared with the first display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-1) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for moving a lighting portion in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 is a group. Lights up with high brightness according to the direction of travel of the notice),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data that does not move the lighting portion in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 is high over a plurality of locations. Lights up with brightness).

As a result, it is possible to express how characters appear in the first display period and a plurality of characters appear one after another in the second display period. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-2) In the first luminance data table, the lighting means located in the vicinity of the character is lit with high luminance according to the progress position of the character first displayed in the group effect, and the character is lit. It includes luminance data for turning off or lighting the lighting means located in the vicinity of a non-reachable portion with low luminance (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 54 (a)).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness at the place where it has not reached yet, so the lamp is turned on. It can be used to express how the leading character progresses. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-3) In the first brightness data table, the lighting means is turned on with high brightness, and then, as the character first displayed in the group effect progresses, the lighting means is turned off or turned on with low brightness. It includes luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 54 (a)).

As a result, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off or lights up with low brightness at places that have not yet reached or have already passed. , It is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-4) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high luminance and then lighting the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect with high luminance. (For example, an example of the grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 54 (a)),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data in which the lighting means is lit with high luminance and then the lighting means located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is not lit with high luminance (for example, FIG. 54). Example of grandchild table W2 for frame lamp shown in (b)).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at the place where it has not reached yet or the place where it has already passed. Or, since it lights up at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(11-5) The first luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and turning off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the frame shown in FIG. 54 (a)). Example of grandchild table W1 for lamp),
The second luminance data table includes luminance data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness and lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 54 (b)). Example).

As a result, in the first display period, the lamp lights up with high brightness as the character running at the beginning displayed first progresses, and the lamp turns off at the place where it has not reached yet or the place where it has already passed. Or, since it lights up at low brightness, it is possible to express how the leading character progresses by using the lighting of the lamp. Further, in the second display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters progress one after another. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-1) The third luminance data table includes luminance data for increasing the number of the lighting means to be turned off according to the progress of the character in the group effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, a grandchild for a frame lamp). The table W3 is turned off or turned on at low brightness according to the traveling direction of the group notice).

As a result, in the third display period, the lamp is turned off or turned on with low brightness as the character progresses, so that it is possible to express how the character progresses by using the turning off or on of the lamp. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(12-3) In the third luminance data table, the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group effect is the character in the group effect. It is shorter than the switching interval of the luminance data in the lighting means arranged in the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction opposite to the traveling direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec. The switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

Thereby, in the third display period, it is possible to express how the character progresses from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappears. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, the control of the lighting means starts at the timing related to the start of the first display period, and the control of the lighting means ends during the first display period.
In the second luminance data table, the control of the lighting means is started during the first display period, the control of the lighting means is continued even during the second display period, and the lighting is performed during the third display period. The control of the means is finished,
In the third luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts during the third display period (for example, an example of the group notice luminance data table shown in FIG. 75).

As a result, the lamp lights up from the middle of the first display period with high brightness as in the second display period, so the state in which the character progresses from before the second display period can be expressed with excitement by lighting the lamp. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(13-2) In the second luminance data table, the control period of the lighting means is set longer than that of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table.
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period of the lighting means than the third luminance data table (for example, an example of the group advance luminance data table shown in FIG. 75).

As a result, it is possible to express the appearance of a plurality of characters one after another in the first display period with an appropriate length. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-1) The luminance data first defined in the first luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 53). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, the first luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

This is more preferable because the lamp lights up when the group notice effect is executed after a break is made without mixing with the lighting of the lamp that was performed before the group notice effect was executed. A group notice production can be provided.

(14-2) The luminance data initially defined in each of the second luminance data table and the third luminance data table is the luminance that does not turn off or turn off the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect. It is data (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, in the frame lamp grandchild tables W2 and W3, the lamp lights up with high luminance for the first luminance data).

As a result, when the characters are progressing one after another after the group notice effect is executed, the player emphasizes the flow of the effect and performs the group notice effect without separating by turning off all the lamps and turning on the low brightness. Can be shown to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(14-3) The luminance data finally defined in the third luminance data table is the luminance data for turning off or lighting the plurality of lighting means used in the group effect with low luminance (for example, FIG. 53). As shown, in the frame lamp grandchild table W3, the last luminance data is turned off or turned on at low luminance for all the lamps).

As a result, when the group notice effect ends, all the lamps are turned off or turned on with low brightness, so that the player can recognize that the group notice effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified as such).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed so as not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the same luminance data is used in the frame lamp grandchild table W3. Luminance data is not specified for repeated use).

As a result, for the luminance data in the third display period, which is set for a longer period than the second display period, the degree of freedom in design is increased by defining the luminance data as it is. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat the luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat the luminance data of the same control content. (For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W1, and the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the frame lamp grandchild table W2. Luminance data is specified),
In the first luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is specified last, while in the second luminance data table, the luminance data for defect countermeasures is not specified last (for example,). As shown in FIG. 53, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 defines 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, and the frame lamp grandchild table W2 does not specify 10-minute data for defect countermeasures).

As a result, the data capacity of the luminance data in the second display period set over a long period of time can be reduced. On the other hand, for the luminance data in the first display period, the luminance data is specified as it is, but instead, the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified, so that the defect countermeasures are taken during the 10 minutes. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(16-2) The luminance data for troubleshooting is the luminance data in which the longest time is defined among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is from the beginning of the first luminance data table. It is luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, 10-minute data for defect countermeasures is specified in the frame lamp grandchild table W1).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting control of the lamp from the beginning of the first luminance data table by the 10-minute data for defect countermeasures, so that a suitable group notice effect can be provided.

(16-3) The luminance data for defect countermeasures is luminance data for regularly lighting adjacent lighting means in order (for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), for defect countermeasures for 10 minutes. The luminance data of is the luminance data in which adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location is deviated from the previous state).

As a result, even if a problem occurs, the adjacent frame lamps are regularly lit in order so that the lighting location deviates from the previous state, so that it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated, which is preferable. A group notice production can be provided.

(17-1) The lighting means are a single-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a multi-color lighting means (for example, on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9) that are lit in a plurality of colors. Including ~ 9C13)
The luminance data for lighting the monochromatic lighting means with a specific high luminance includes a specific value (for example, “6”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting, and includes the specific value (for example, “6”).
The luminance data for lighting the plurality of color lighting means with the specific high luminance includes a value larger than the specific value (for example, “8” to “F”) as a value corresponding to the specific high luminance lighting.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light between the lamps that are lit with high brightness by making the values corresponding to the lighting of high brightness appropriate according to the type of light emitting means, and it is possible to produce a suitable group notice. Can be provided.

(17-2) The single-color lighting means includes a first-color lighting means that lights in the first color (for example, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) and a second-color lighting means that lights in the second color (for example, the left side of the board). Including lamps 9B1-9B5)
Regardless of the luminance data for lighting any of the first color lighting means and the second color lighting means with the specific high luminance, the specific value (for example, "for example," 6 ”) is included.

As a result, it is possible to adjust the variation in light even among the lamps that are lit in the same single color, and it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(18-1) Both the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data different from each other for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, FIG. 54). Grandchild table for frame lamp shown in),
The luminance data table used in the advance notice effect, which is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, is the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the game machine. It contains common luminance data for each (eg, grandchild table for frame lamps shown in FIG. 61).

As a result, in the group notice effect, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R, a more detailed lighting mode can be realized, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. can.

(19-1) The group effect interrupts during the execution of a notice effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is different from the group effect and foretells that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result. May be executed in
Even when the group effect is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light according to the luminance data table corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162).
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the notice effect, or includes the lighting means used in the notice effect and the lighting means not used in the notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 60, in the reach line effect, there is a period in which the on-board lamp and the attacker lamp, which are always used in the group notice effect, are not used).

As a result, even when the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, since the common lamp is lit, it is possible to realize the effect by lighting without discomfort, and provide a suitable group notice effect. be able to. For example, if the group notice effect is executed by interrupting another notice effect, the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in the other notice effect are mixed, but the lamp that lights in both of them is assumed to be. If they are different from each other, many lamps are complicatedly turned on, which makes the appearance unattractive and may give the player a sense of discomfort. In this respect, if the lighting of the lamp in the group notice effect and the lighting of the lamp in other notice effects are made common, it is possible to prevent a large number of lamps from being complicatedly turned on.

(19-2) The advance notice effect ends during the execution of the group effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, a symbol feed effect) different from the advance notice effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 161 and 162). Example),
The lighting means used in the group effect is the same as the lighting means used in the predetermined effect, or includes the lighting means used in the predetermined effect and the lighting means not used in the predetermined effect. (For example, the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162).

As a result, even if the group is switched to another effect during the group notice effect, the common lamp is lit, so that the effect of lighting can be realized without discomfort, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(19-3) The group effect is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group notice lottery shown in FIG. 20).

As a result, it is determined whether or not the group notice effect is executed by lottery regardless of other effects, so that the processing burden related to the execution of the group notice effect can be reduced, and a suitable group notice effect can be provided. ..

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, V lamp 9G) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means can be lit when controlled to the advantageous state, and does not light when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is a round of a big hit gaming state in which a V prize can be generated. Lights up to notify you that you are inside or that a V prize has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 53).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which causes the player to misunderstand whether the lamp is controlled to an advantageous state such as a big hit. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, stick controller lamp 9J, trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is effective by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J is turned on to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A and is triggered. The button lamp 9K lights up to prompt the operation of pressing the push button 31B),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, an example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 53).

As a result, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character advances in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, which makes the player misunderstand whether the operation of the operating means is being promoted. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described.

(About the display period of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

As a result, by making the character that first appeared in the first display period look longer, it is possible to make it easier to pay attention to the fact that the group notice effect suggesting a big hit has been executed.

(About the execution timing of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a lost display result, the group notice effect is executed in the latter half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a lost display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the variable display time than in the first half of the variable display time. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a hit display result, the group notice effect is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a probability of 100%. Not limited to. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the result of variable display is a hit display result, even if the group notice effect is executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the latter half of the variable display time. good.

(About the characters that appear in the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the main character Maid A (Yumemu-chan) appears as the first (first) character in the first display period, but the main character Maid A appears most often in the second display period. (Yumemu-chan) may be.

As a result, the character of the main character can be frequently shown to the player in the longest second display period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the character displayed first in the first display period may be a premier character.

As a result, the premier character can be shown to the player first in the first first display period, and the group notice effect can be made to have an impact. If the character displayed first in the first display period is a premier character, the jackpot may be fixed. Further, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp such as the frame lamp may be a pattern including a rainbow (seven colors).

The premier character may be the character with the lowest appearance rate among all the states and effects, or may be a character that does not appear except for the group notice effect. Further, the premier character may be a character that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher by appearing than other characters.

(About lighting control in group notice production)
In the present embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in FIG. 54, but the luminance data may be defined as follows. That is, it includes the first specific brightness data that combines the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness and the data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, and the data for lighting the lighting means with low brightness. There is a second specific brightness data that does not include data for lighting the lighting means with high brightness, the first specific lighting data is not used in the first brightness data table, and the second brightness data table is the second. Specific lighting data may be used.

By doing so, since the data to be lit with high brightness is not specified in the first display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are approaching by illuminating the lamp with low brightness. Since the data that lights up with high brightness is defined in the display period, it is possible to express how a plurality of characters are progressing one after another.

Further, the third luminance data table may include luminance data for turning off all the lighting means that were lit in the second luminance data table.

By doing so, it is possible to express how the character progresses and disappears in the third display period by turning off the lamp.

Further, the lighting means includes a specific lighting means at a position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group effect.
A specific member capable of transmitting light is arranged on the front side of the specific lighting means.
When the specific lighting means is lit, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes a specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color.
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include the luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means.

By doing so, the lamp at the position related to the direction in which the character travels in the group notice effect is turned on during the group notice effect, and the lamp is lit through the transparent specific member located on the front side of the lamp. It is possible to prevent the color to be visually recognized from interfering with the color of the group notice effect by becoming a specific color that is not used in the group notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group notice effect.

(About the video data of the group notice production)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, moving image data in which the character to be operated and the operation content (operation pattern) of the character are associated with each other in advance is created at the design stage, and the moving image data is obtained. Was stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces the moving image data stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It was. However, the moving image of the group notice effect may be reproduced by a method different from the above.

For example, the data of the character to be operated and the data indicating the operation content (operation pattern) may be stored in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121 as separate data. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect control CPU 120 obtains character data and operation patterns stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached, based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. It may be the one that selects each of the indicated data, creates moving image data by combining both, and reproduces the created moving image data.

More specifically, in the RAM 122 or the ROM 121, a plurality of data in which each of the character A, the character B, and the character C runs or walks is stored in the storage area 1, and an arbitrary plurality of data for which the character is not determined is determined. It suffices to store the moving image data showing a plurality of operation patterns related to the group advance notice effect in the storage area 2, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the character from the storage area 1 when the execution timing of the group advance notice effect is reached. The moving image data related to the group notice effect may be extracted from the storage area 2 and combined to create one group notice effect moving image data, and the created moving image data may be reproduced.

(When the group notice production and other notice production overlap)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 159, when the execution period of the group notice effect overlaps with the execution period of another notice effect, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is in the other notice effect. An image that is larger than the display area of the image and that the display of the image in the group notice effect has priority over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is the image in the other advance notice effect). It was on the front side of the display layer). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect. May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the group notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the other notice effect, and the image in the other notice effect May be prioritized over the display of the image in the group notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the other notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the group notice effect). Further, when the execution period of the group notice effect and the execution period of another notice effect overlap, the display area of the image in the other notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group notice effect, and the image in the group notice effect is displayed. The display may be prioritized over the display of the image in the other notice effect (for example, the layer of the image display in the group notice effect is on the front side of the layer of the image display in the other notice effect). When the display area of the image in the other advance notice effect is larger than the display area of the image in the group advance notice effect, for example, the advance notice image that the player pays attention to, such as an image suggesting a big hit, depends on the image in the group advance notice effect. Although hidden, images located around the preview image (for example, an image showing a flame, an aura, etc. surrounding the preview image) include those that can be visually recognized without being hidden by the image in the group preview effect.

(Example of time saving control that does not go through hit)
Next, an example of executing a time saving control that does not go through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) as a time saving state will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving symbol)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always shifts via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7A. It may be made to shift to the state). That is, as the time saving state, the time saving control may be executed without going through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.).

(A2) As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of a lost symbol or a part of a small hit symbol.

(A3) Further, when the lottery process relating to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol is performed, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol. Or a random number for performing other lottery such as a lottery random number of a big hit symbol, a lottery random number of a small hit symbol, a random number for determining a big hit lottery, and a lottery random number of a fall lottery, the lottery may be performed.

(A4) Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

(A5) Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the time-saving symbol is used for all the set values. Although the lottery probabilities are the same, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start port (first start). It may be at the time of winning a prize at the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving symbol is drawn. When a small hit symbol random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a fall lottery judgment value random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the fall lottery judgment value random number can be used as the winning value. , A lottery using a structure, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

(A8) In the case where the lottery of the time-saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number (time-saving number) of the time-saving state is determined by the presence or absence of passing through the time-saving region. Make sure it doesn't change.

(A9) Regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, the specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and the big hit symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

(A10) Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving is already in the state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings given may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) Further, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

(A15) Further, the number of times the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed (time reduction end lottery) is executed, and the number of time reductions is set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. That is, in principle, the number of working hours may not be set and may be unlimited.

(A16) Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

(A17) Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

(A18) Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, a high probability at the time of opening the game hall. It is a low-base state, and the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

(A20) Further, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

(A21) Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Other time saving control examples using time saving symbols)
As another time saving control using the time saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the special symbol is performed in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving symbol is displayed, the game control for further shifting from the time saving state to the same time saving state is not performed (even if the time saving symbol is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (time saving state). May not be controlled to switch the game state). Then, different effects may be produced when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special symbol in the time-saving state (decorative symbol). In the normal state, a special symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol, and in the time-saving state, a general lost symbol is displayed.) This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special symbol is the time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays the common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. A different symbol may be displayed as a display result in the reduced working hours state (for example, the decorative symbol displays a special symbol corresponding to the reduced working hours symbol in the normal state, but simply displays a lost symbol in the reduced working hours state, etc.). Do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, the display result of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state does not give the player a feeling of loss, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect suggesting whether or not the display result of the decorative symbol is a special symbol (time saving symbol) is executed, but in the time saving state, the decorative symbol is executed. It is also possible not to execute the effect suggesting whether or not the display result of is a special symbol (time saving symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player has lost the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect in the time-saving state, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbol (the time for displaying the fixed surface result and then maintaining the display state) differs between the normal state and the time saving state. You may control it. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game without causing the player to feel that the decorative pattern is produced in a time-saving state.

(B5) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. (Display effect, etc.), right-handed game is played in response to right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed) during the time-saving state, and variable display based on the hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Until all is done. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B6) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and it is a normal state. In, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol being displayed in the special symbol, and the time-saving symbol is variable in the special symbol in the time-saving state. Do not perform game control to shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state based on the display result (the time saving state is overwritten even if the time saving symbol is displayed (so that the time saving state occurs again). N) The switching control of the gaming state may not be performed). The second variable display has a higher ratio of displaying the variable display result of the time saving symbol than the first variable display, and the information related to the variable display is stored as the hold storage information, and the hold storage is completed when the time saving state ends. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether or not the information is stored (when shifting to time saving control, it is possible to specify that the time saving continuous display is performed, and when shifting to time saving control, the time saving control is not executed. During the time saving state, a right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until all the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. Left-handed notification (notification instructing left-handed) may not be performed. This enables suitable control according to the state when the variable display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed (for example, the effect is improved by executing the effect according to the presence or absence of the transition of the state).

(B7) Left-handed notification is executed in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is completed. You may. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit (small hit, big hit) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed is It may be different. As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B9) In the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends, a common effect is obtained when there is holding storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed and when there is no holding storage information. It is possible to execute different effects after executing (For example, when there is hold storage information in which the display result of the time saving symbol is displayed in the fourth hold storage information out of the four remaining hold storage, the third hold memory A common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed until the variable display based on the information, and a time saving state return effect different from the common effect is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. It may be possible). As a result, the effect of the notification mode of the right-handed notification does not give the player a feeling of loss due to the display result of the decorative pattern, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(B10) The effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) stored based on the remaining holding storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining holding storage information. The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed differs depending on the effect at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, the production changes according to the game state, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(B11) Confirmation display time of display result in variable display (second variable display) based on remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after the confirmed surface result is displayed. The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information is executed may be common. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period when the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed and the variable display is based on the remaining hold storage information. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period when the next variable display is started. As a result, since the instruction of how to hit is given appropriately, the game can be smoothly advanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game control for shifting from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) is performed, and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result) such as a hit symbol or a big hit symbol or a time-saving symbol (special display result). The ratio of the time-saving symbols (special display result) may be different depending on which of the common specific effects provided is executed. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right-handed notification may be executed during the initial period at which the next variable display is started. As a result, it is possible to suitably control the effect according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a hit symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is abundant, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control has a common variation pattern depending on whether it is a hit symbol (specific display result), a time-saving symbol (special display result), or a lost symbol (predetermined display result). Is selectable, and even when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command for specifying the same fluctuation pattern from the game control CPU 103, different effects are displayed in the variable display according to the type of the symbol specification command that specifies the display result. May be made feasible. As a result, the variation of the variable display effect is enriched, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained may or may not be executed (for example, a plurality of types). Of the super reach productions in the above, when performing the production with the highest expectation, the special production is not executed, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (ratio) of a time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special effect is executed may be different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for a hit (a display moved from the display position of the hold display to another display position, and is currently being executed). The degree of expectation (ratio) that becomes the time saving symbol (special display result) is made different according to the effect mode of the effect) that displays the effect that can suggest the expectation of the hit corresponding to the variable display of. May be good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, after performing the effect (such as the time-saving suggestion effect) that suggests that the time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, the winning symbol (specification) is executed. It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot whose game value is higher than that of a time-saving state) to notify the display result). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game because the expectation that is a hit is maintained without executing the effect of inciting only the time saving state excessively.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled to a time reduction state (special state) in which the number of time reductions (time reduction continuation period) differs according to the types of time reduction symbols (special display results) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the first). The 1st time reduction symbol: 50 times of time reduction, the 2nd time reduction symbol: 100 times of time reduction, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time reduction symbol is stopped depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect, etc.). You may execute effects with different number of time reductions (duration). As a result, depending on the type of production, the player's attention can be focused on the subsequent time reduction, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the special state in the normal state, the game is controlled to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. The transmitted command includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the effect control CPU 120 executes a plurality of types of commands including the special command. A look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information when received. You may want to limit the execution (do not execute at all, make it executable in rare cases, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the look-ahead of the hold storage information, the look-ahead for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information specified to execute the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot gaming state (specific game state) is executed. The execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. Then, as the look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of such a look-ahead notice effect, it may be possible to execute the effect of a common mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) The variable display based on the hold storage information for the look-ahead target is a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed, and a variable display in which the time saving symbol (special display result) is displayed. In both the display and the case, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect for the hold storage information generated after the hold storage information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B25) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute an effect having a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, hold when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red). Do not change the display color to red, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(B26) The look-ahead notice effect during the execution restriction of the look-ahead notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, when the expectation of the color of the hold display is blue <green <red, the color of the hold display is changed to red. Do not change, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by limiting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state shifts.

(Example of time reduction control using the variable display count that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the loss variable display count)
Next, an example of time saving control using a variable display count (number of continuations of variable display that has been lost) that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in a normal state will be described. As shown below, in the time saving state (special state), the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached the special number (for example, 1000 times). May be feasible on condition. As the predetermined result, the time saving state (special state) may be executed on condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the loss display result reaches the special number of times.

(C1) A game based on the fact that the variable display result becomes a specific display result after the first variable display by the first special symbol and the second variable display by the second special symbol are performed. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the person, and the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and the numerical information is concerned. Based on the above, when the special condition that the number of executions (continuation) of the variable display resulting in the predetermined display result reaches the special number (for example, 1000 times) is satisfied, the normal state is changed to the time saving state (special state). You may control the game to be transferred. Then, the numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times that the predetermined display result is obtained is continuously updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, so that the player can be easily rescued due to the time saving state. , It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time saving state.

(C2) The special condition is satisfied when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result is continuously displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). You may do it. As a result, when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (probability change state, time saving state). As a result, the player can be suitably relieved when the display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuous.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be satisfied by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when it is no longer necessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition May be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress relief when the player no longer needs to be rescued, such as when the player is in a time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling from being increased more than necessary. Can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. As a result, it becomes possible to control the time saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs substantially, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the backup is stored when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, so that it is suppressed from being disadvantageous to the amusement park side.

(C8) Based on the fact that the numerical information has reached the special number of times (for example, 1000 times or more), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for a period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more). In the time saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time saving state (special state) and A different effect may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game that is in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), the variable display time of the second time saving state is shorter than that of the first time saving state. It is possible to change the appearance of the production, such as, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game. It should be noted that the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state) without executing such an effect. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware that the player is in an extremely disadvantageous state, such as being controlled by the second time saving state (special state), and suppresses a decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process relating to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The third process for controlling the time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to hit the game ball into the first path (left side game area) and the second path (right side game area). In the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. Then, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), it is notified that the second path should be fired (for example, right-handed notification by a right-handed lamp or the like). You may do it. Further, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, by turning on the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the launch direction early (before the actual start of the time reduction fluctuation) when actually shifting to the time reduction state (special state). Will be.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. .. As a result, since the control to the advantageous state is prioritized over the control to the time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the player's hobby of the game is enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes a specific value based on the fact that the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, waiting for customers), it is controlled to a time saving state (special state), and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached). When changing the flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set) and controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). You may. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the control of shifting to the time saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines a variation pattern of variable display, and selects and determines a variation pattern of a symbol determination time that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to the variable display is executed, and the value of the special figure process flag is different from the first numerical value (4 or later). ), The second process related to the advantageous state (big hit game state) is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied. The third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command can execute the effect based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, fluctuation pattern) according to the case where the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value and the third numerical value in the special state. .. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. For example, different gaming states can be suitably identified, which facilitates gaming control. Then, if the command is different according to the game state identified at that time, the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) can execute suitable effect control according to the game state.

(C14) In the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is satisfied, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value. By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the end of the big hit game state (for example, the time is shortened). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), there are cases where the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the special condition (variable display number of times). It may be possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). The fluctuation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the special display result (time saving symbol) is displayed is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and the special condition (variable display number of times) It may be possible to execute different effects depending on whether the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In some cases, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time was shortened after the big hit was completed). As a result, it is possible to perform the production of a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), the case where the special display result (time saving symbol) is displayed is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and the special condition (variable display number of times) It may be possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time is controlled to the time saving state (special state) (for example, the time saving state is set when the variable display number is equal to or more than the special number of times). In such a case, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit is completed). As a result, since no new production data is required, the development cost is not increased, and the game entertainment can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 receives predetermined information (based on the backed up and stored data when the power is turned on). It is possible to transmit a ram clear command at the time of cold start and a command for notifying the number of fluctuations displayed until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. A suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display was executed in a predetermined period after the power was turned on (so-called morning output is different, the background image is different, and an effect that suggests whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuation is executed. (Easy, etc.) may be made feasible. It is possible to give the player a motivation to play the game in the morning, so that the operating rate of the game machine increases and the processing load does not increase.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command capable of specifying information related to the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in connection with the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 is capable of transmitting the effect control CPU 120. It may be possible to execute a special effect (such as an effect of suggesting the end of the number of time-saving states) related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. Then, as the specific information, the first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect) capable of specifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is a predetermined value (for example, 127) or less is specified. Information) and second specific information (such as a command that counts down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 127). May be good. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss by periodically suggesting the function to the player, and it is possible to suitably realize the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 is put into a time saving state (special state) when the special condition is satisfied, based on the execution of the variable display of the first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect (for time-saving state suggestion effect control) suggesting that it is controlled, and a second predetermined number of times (for example, a second predetermined number of times) less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the variable display of the special number of times is executed. It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display (such as 100 times) is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly losing the player by suggesting the function to the player on a regular basis.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. A different effect (such as a different effect when shifting to the time-saving state) is executed when the state is controlled to the special state based on the satisfaction of the condition and when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like, and the game control CPU 103 is used when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is satisfied. The backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 has the special condition (variable) after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. The special display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the specific display result (hit symbol) is displayed after the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the display count condition) and after the backup-stored data is initialized. When the condition is controlled based on the condition, different effects are executed after being controlled to the time saving state (special state) (the effect after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). As a result, even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated, it becomes possible to perform appropriate control. In addition, the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized depending on the difference in the production. Therefore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability setting can be changed, the setting is changed. Since it is possible to grasp the possibility that the setting has been made, the elements for guessing the setting are increased and the game entertainment can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the reduced working hours symbol, the case where the big hit occurs, or the case where the loss occurs.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but is an enclosed type that encloses the gaming media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, depending on the player. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It ’s a gaming machine 1),
A group effect executing means (for example, a group advance notice execution process shown in FIG. 37) for executing a group effect (for example, a group advance notice effect) for displaying an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group, 6 shown in FIGS. 84 to 90. With crowd notice production)
The display period of the image in the group effect includes the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 49).
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters (for example, the figure). 84 (a23) to the period shown in FIG. 86 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated (for example, FIG. 87 (a31) to the period shown in FIG. 88 (a36)),
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character (for example, FIGS. 89 (a37) to 90 (a42). Period shown),
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed (for example, the example shown in FIGS. 47 and 84),
Moreover,
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 173-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 173-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 173-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are a portion drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority), and a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, according to such a configuration, the group effect can be more preferably executed. Further, since a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in the predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and the display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect, these displacements can be displayed. The specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data as compared with the case where the image data of the specific image is stored exclusively. Further, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image at the time of executing the specific effect, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is deteriorated.

That is, in the first display period, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than the first situation from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, and the second situation. After the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed, the character is newly displayed and the displayed character is not displayed in the second display period longer than the first display period. By eliminating the situation where only a single character is displayed, it is possible to surely inform the player that it is a group production, and the start and continuation of the group production are preferably executed and the group is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the effect, execute the specific effect with a small amount of data, and prevent the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from being lowered when the specific effect is executed. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a specific effect with a small amount of data without deteriorating the visibility of the display image of the game-related information without deteriorating the game interest when installed in the amusement park.

Further, the degree of freedom in design can be increased, and a specific effect can be executed with a small amount of data, and the visibility of the displayed image of the game-related information can be prevented from being deteriorated. As an example, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a design), and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 173-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 173-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 173-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG) for displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
A game machine can be mentioned. An example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 163 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 165). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 163, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 165), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 163, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of an ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 163), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 165).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 165).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 165. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electrical components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power supply switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 166, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 167. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 167 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 167 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 166 being executed after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 164 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 169 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 169 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 169 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 169 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". Further, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical range is "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special map has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special map and the gaming state is a normal state or a time-saving state is as shown in FIG. 169 (A).

As shown in FIG. 169 (B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". Further, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical range is "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special map has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special map and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 169 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and the "missing time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 170, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to the setting. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values that can take the value in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346). Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio of the variable display result to be out of time is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 171. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 171 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 171 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 172, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute a game by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature Unit 006SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine).
It has a display area in which an image can be displayed, and the display area is smaller than the game-related information related to the progress of the game (for example, the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the decorative symbol). A display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a design) and
A storage means (for example, CGROM205) that can store image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information.
A plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, and a display image creation area shown in FIGS. 173-5). An image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers.
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 173-17).
Equipped with
The storage means sets the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from the first position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. Can store display position displacement information for displacement to a different second position (for example, in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, displacement in the CGROM 205). The part where the image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, shown in FIGS. 173-23). As described above, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward and the images of the middle region 006SG005C are moved downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion effect. The part that creates the image),
The effect executing means displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modification 006SG-1). It is possible to execute an effect, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a look-ahead notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, only the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image are used, and the display position of the specific image is changed from the first position to the first position. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing it at two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be suppressed as compared with the case where the specific effect is executed using the dedicated image data. ..

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-26, the first interface. The image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information is not displaced together with at least a part of the specific image, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is an image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Duplicate display),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displacement specific image, so that the player feels uncomfortable. You can recognize game-related information without any problem.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in a region that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display region (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is a left region 006SG005L, a middle region 006SG005C, and a right region during the development suggestion effect. The part displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of the area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become the displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so that the player can accurately perform the game. Can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the second to fourth embodiments.
A game identification information variable display executing means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 165) capable of executing variable display of game identification information (for example, special symbol) is provided. ,
The effect executing means is
In the first area in the display area, it is possible to execute variable display of the effect identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-21, the image display device 5 In the central part of the display area, the part where variable display of decorative symbols can be executed according to the variable display of special symbols),
In the second area in the display area, which is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, it is possible to execute the variable display of the reduced identification information according to the variable display of the game identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 173-21, in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion capable of performing variable display of a small symbol according to variable display of a special symbol).
The display image of the effect identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and the visual state is changed from the first visual state to the second visual state, which is less visible to the player than the first visual state, according to the execution of the specific effect. The decorative pattern changes to a state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 and 173-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed. The part where visibility is reduced by moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visual recognition state does not change from the first visual recognition state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 173-21 and 173-23 are shown in FIGS. 173-21 and 173-23. As described above, the small symbol is drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbol, it does not move from the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the identification information for the effect from the first visual state to the second visual state by the execution of the specific effect, and the effect is reduced by the execution of the specific effect. Since the visual recognition state of the identification information does not change from the first visual recognition state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during the execution of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 173-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 173-31). 006SG005B), including
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-31 (C), the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are displayed. (A portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image), it is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, the figure). As shown in 173-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),.
When the relative position between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displaced, the first specific display area and the first specific display area are located at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 An effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, the cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIGS. 173-31) is displayed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player more effectively recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The effect executing means can displace the first specific display area in the first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect, and the second specific can be used. The display area can be displaced toward the second direction opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-31 (D), the upper area 006SG005T is on the right side and the lower area 006SG005B is on the left side. A portion to be moved toward the direction, or a portion to move the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward as shown in FIG. 173-31 (E)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as a specific effect, the displacement of the specific image to the second position is the second direction opposite to the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the first direction of the second specific display area. By executing it as a displacement in the direction, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh embodiment.
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are used as pre-reading notice effects. When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005B is different).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth and eighth embodiments.
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is a decoration. The part that is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the design or background image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the display position of the specific image is displaced as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, the displacement of the display position of the specific image is made more conspicuous by comparing these specific images with the effect image. It is possible to further improve the effect of a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the tenth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to nine embodiments.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect executing means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 173-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors of blue and red, and a portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 173-33, the part where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display mode the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 173-30, the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in any color. The part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on the color, or the part where the jackpot expectation is different depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed as shown in FIG. 173-33).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the eleventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth embodiments.
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes stepwise (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-21, it is displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG. The part where the amount of movement of the image is gradually increased, and as shown in FIG. 173-27, the decorative pattern inside is gradually expanded in the revival production of the modified example 006SG-2. As shown in Fig. 173-35, the part where the amount of movement of the fragments constituting the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image is gradually large in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5. The part to go),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by changing the specific image step by step.

The gaming machine of the form 12 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position toward the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-21, the development suggestion of the feature unit 006SG. In the production, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 173-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are stepwise from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral edge portion of the display area. The moving part, the part where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the displacement from the first position to the second position of the specific image in the specific effect can be emphasized, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh embodiment.
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments as shown in FIGS. 173-28).
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces is gradually increased (for example, as shown in the modified example 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside are the progress of the revival effect. The part that gradually increases according to),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to strongly impress the player with a specific effect by the visual effect that the image pieces gradually increase.

The gaming machine of the form 14 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
The specific effect is an effect in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased (for example, in the hot water shown in FIG. 1-28, in the revival effect, the image display device 5 is used. The part where the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area gradually increases),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively attracted to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 11 to 14.
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The storage means can store a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206).
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display position displacement information the specific image is displaced from (for example, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the left region 006SG005L, While the displacement image data for sliding the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R to the third stage is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area are used. Since the displacement image data for sliding the image of 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion effect. Part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 16th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 11th to 15th forms.
The plurality of display position displacement information is the first display position change information in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-21, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are displacement image data for sliding movement to the third stage), and the specific image is from the first aspect to the first aspect. The second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-22, in the variable display with the normal reach displacement pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are the first stage. Or data for displacement image for sliding to the second stage), including
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change portion in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, FIG. As shown in 173-21 and FIG. 173-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to move to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, In the case of using the displacement image data in which the image of the right region 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the portion where the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage is common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. When the displacement image data is used, the part where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is common).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect as the specific effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the 17th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 16th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed over the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-31 (C), the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are displayed. (A portion for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image), it is possible to display an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displacement specific image (for example, the figure). As shown in 173-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),.
After the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, shown in FIGS. 173-31 (D) and 173-31 (E)). (A portion in which the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved to the left side, and then the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the effect of the specific effect can be enhanced. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment.
The boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. It is displaceable in the direction (eg, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (D) and 173-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the upper part. The boundary between the area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is a part that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific effect can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary portion between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of the 19th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 18th forms.
At least in the specific display layer, the image can be arranged over the area corresponding to the display area and the area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 173-39, the promotion effect is executed. At the time, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is outside the display area of the image display device 5. Placement part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when a displacement specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display is performed in the display area.
In the modified example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when the promotion effect (specific effect) is executed, the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying a displacement image to the whole, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 19.
The effect executing means can enlarge the image displayed in the display area during the period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, depending on the progress of the promotion effect). The part that gradually enlarges the decorative pattern drawn / placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / placed in the layer 3 image drawing area),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area in the process of displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the effect of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 21st form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example,). As shown in the modification 006SG-3, the part where the image manually displayed in the upper region 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B are different),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 20th forms.
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (for example, lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area.
The effect executing means displays the specific image over the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and the first specific display area and the second specific image are displayed as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose position is displaced relative to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-31 (D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , The upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left side).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area is displayed. It is the same (for example, as shown in the modified example 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side). At least part of the common part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to give unexpectedness to a specific effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to the form 21 or the form 22.
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. In the display area of the image display device 5, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are not displayed in the area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in the modification 006SG-3, at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect). A part of the image displayed over is not displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. part),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the production interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 23rd forms.
The display means can display a stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'. Is a part where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image) can be displayed),
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect for displaying the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-45 (B), a portion where the notice effect during variable display can be displayed on the stereoscopic image).
When the specific effect is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 173-45 (D), when the development suggestion effect is executed, the development is performed. The part where the image displayed as a suggestion effect is displayed as a stereoscopic image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic effect, and the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific effect, so that the specific effect can be suitably carried out.

The gaming machine of the form 25 is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 24.
The image for the right eye and the image for the left eye are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the specific effect is executed, the stereoscopic effect can be suitably executed.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to the 24th or 25th form.
The effect executing means can execute the stereoscopic effect as an introduction effect of the specific effect in a period before the execution period of the specific effect during variable display.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the specific effect is executed by executing the stereoscopic effect, so that the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 173-1, the effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates according to the program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives the effect control command via the input circuit 260. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control of the image display device 5 such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 on the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 based on the effect control command. Perform the processing to make it.

As shown in FIG. 173-1, the display control unit 123 includes characters (also referred to as image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, and CG data), decorative patterns, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. The first reserved storage display area 006SG005D for displaying the image and the first special figure reserved storage number as game-related information in the feature unit 006SG and the second reserved storage for displaying the second special figure reserved storage number in a identifiable manner. Displayed together with CGROM205 for storing data such as the first interface image 006SG005I for displaying the display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol, and SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received effect control command to the display control unit 123. The CGROM 205 previously stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and background image image data. It is a ROM for storing. The CGROM 205 in the feature unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for shifting the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the displacement target image to be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing a character, the drawing order of the character, the number of colors, the enlargement / reduction ratio, and the like. Attribute register 203 that stores (data that specifies palette numbers, coordinates, etc.), drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in the drawing area described later in the VRAM area, and CG data stored in CGROM 205 in the VRAM area. Data transfer control unit 211 that controls transfer, video signals for displaying image data stored in the display image creation area described later in the VRAM area (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the data to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected to the system bus. The image processing DSP 264 is connected. Further, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via the CG bus interface 204. The system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and the attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus so that the system register 202 can be accessed. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus so that the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203 can be accessed.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via the VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus so that the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

In the system register 202, a system control register for storing instructions such as initial setting, drawing, and data transfer, an interrupt control register for storing interrupt signal output instructions described later, a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register for storing an area and the like, a data transfer register for storing a transfer source address and a transfer destination address at the time of data transfer, a display register for storing a display image creation area in the VRAM area, and the like are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the effect control CPU 120 at each start of the V blank (cycle for updating the image), and outputs various other interrupt signals to the effect control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing for outputting the image data of the display image creation area of the VRAM area designated by the display register as a video signal. In the feature unit 006SG, the display image creation area and the drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, the area allocated as the drawing area is drawn in a certain V blank, and the area is switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. In the meantime, drawing is performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 173-2 (a) and 173-2 (b), in the feature unit 006SG, an image for displaying on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) a plurality of layers. Is being generated. In the VRAM area, a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each of these layers and an image drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (combined) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image for this is arranged (see FIG. 173-5). It should be noted that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower layers, and the higher the image, the higher the display priority is set in the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the higher the display priority in the image display device 5. Is set low.

As shown in FIGS. 173-5 (A) and 173-5 (B), a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing / arranging a layer 1 image and a layer 2 image are drawn / arranged in the VRAM area. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

In the displacement image creation area, an image obtained by superimposing (combining) an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area is created as a displacement target image. This is an area for creating a displacement image by applying a displacement image described later to the displacement target image.

In the display image creation area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed ( Display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image (combined) or an image in which an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area are superimposed (combined). This is the area to be created as an image.

The image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image having the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), and the image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area is an image display. An image having a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5 and an image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are the most in the image display device 5. Each image has a low display priority (display priority: low).

That is, layer 1 is an upper layer having the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer having an image display priority lower than layer 1, and layer 3 is a lower layer having the lowest image display priority. It is a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 173-2 (b) and 173-5 (B), the layer 1 image drawing area displays the number of reserved first special figures in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 so as to be identifiable. In the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U for identifiable display of the number of reserved storages, and in the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5. This is a drawing area for drawing these images in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J including a small design whose display area is smaller than the decorative design.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns in order to execute variable display of the decorative patterns in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing the background image in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 006SG, an image drawn / arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), an image drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and a layer 3 image drawing area. By superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (the image of the layer 3), it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) have the highest display priority, and thus are the highest in the image display device 5. Since the image (decorative pattern) displayed as the upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image display device 5 The image (background image) displayed in the middle layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is displayed as a low layer image in the image display device 5 because the display priority is set to the lowest.

The image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area in the feature unit 006SG has a transparency of 0% because the upper layer image makes the overlapping portion of the lower layer image invisible to the player when superimposed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the image drawn / arranged in each image drawing area is set to be higher than 0% depending on the situation, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area of the above or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a displacement method of the displacement target image in the feature unit 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 173-3 (A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Explaining the pixel A of one of these a plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 is in the displacement target image according to the values of the R value and the G value of the pixel A from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from. Specifically, if the R value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 moves from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the image to be displaced toward the minus direction (left direction) of the X axis. Is specified as the coordinates (position) of the pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of the pixel A is 129 to 256, the position corresponding to the pixel A in the image to be displaced is in the plus direction (right direction) of the X-axis. The position moved toward the pixel X is specified as the coordinate in the X-axis direction of the pixel X. The amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the R value.

If the G value of the pixel A is 1 to 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is the coordinate of the pixel X in the Y axis direction. If the G value of pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced toward the plus direction (upward) of the Y axis is the Y axis direction of pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of. The amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image is a difference from 128, which is the median value of the G value.

Then, after the position of the pixel X in the displacement target image is specified, the pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at the position corresponding to the pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, the pixel X is displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A. That is, in the present feature unit 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and the G value of the pixel A, any pixel X can be displaced to the position corresponding to the pixel A, and the R value and the G of the pixel A can be displaced. By adjusting the values to the same value, it is possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to the pixel A, to the position corresponding to the pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173-3 (B), the displacement image has a plurality of regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement) in which the R value and the G value are different from each other. Image d) is configured, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 173-4 (A) to 173-4 (C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the region constituting the displacement image. A displacement image a, an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256, a displacement image b, an R value of any one of 1 to 127, and a G value of 128. A displacement image c, a displacement image d having an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 is provided, and an image of a triple circle is used as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 173-4 (D), for the displacement image a, in the displacement target image, the range moved downward by the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a is the displacement image. Specify in the display range of. Further, as shown in FIG. 173-4 (E), for the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved above the difference of the G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify in the range. Further, as shown in FIG. 173-4 (F), for the displacement image c, in the displacement target image, the range moved to the left by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is the displacement image. Specify in the display range. Further, as shown in FIG. 173-4 (G), for the displacement image d, in the displacement target image, the position moved to the right by the difference of the R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is the displacement image. Specify in the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R and G values of the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d is set as the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement. By displacing to the positions of the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 173-4 (H) is generated.

In this feature unit 006SG, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are set to either the R value or the G value as a fixed value, so that the displacement image a, Although the boundaries of the displacement image b, the displacement image c, and the displacement image d are clearly separated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the displacement image a, the displacement image b, and the displacement image d are used. It is also possible to generate an image such as a gradation as a displacement image by gradually making the R value and the G value of the pixels near the boundaries of the image c and the displacement image d different from each other.

FIG. 173-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 006SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 173-6 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 173-6 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 173-6 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 173-6 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, which notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal opening big hit state and the high-speed opening big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 173-6 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 173-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 173-7, in the feature unit 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 173-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 006SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 006SG, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 006SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 006SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 173-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 006SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIG. 173-9 (B). In the feature unit 006SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 006SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 173-9 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 173-9 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 173-10 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 006SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to these, and two types of super reach fluctuation patterns are provided. The above or only one type may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. As the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 173-10, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 006SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 006SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern. That is, the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set so that the jackpot expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” is higher than that of the super reach α fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in the feature unit 006 are displayed in a variable manner. It is also a fluctuation pattern that executes a development suggestion effect to the reach effect of super reach after the reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2). , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed in a variable manner. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the normal reach and the variation pattern of the super reach are illustrated. A fluctuation pattern that does not execute the development suggestion effect may be provided. In addition, when the development suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of developing to the reach effect of the super reach may be set higher than the case where the development suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 173-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 006SG. In this feature unit 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173-11, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. It is determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In the present feature unit 006SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and different jackpot variation pattern determination tables are provided according to the jackpot type. May be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. Determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β off).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PA1-4 using the deviation pattern determination table D. Determined from (non-reach off-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α off-off fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β off-off fluctuation pattern) do.

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%. PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 006SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , The storage number is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on this, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 173-1 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area shown in FIG. 173-15 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 006SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold storage number notification command ( The first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer are associated with these start opening winning designation commands and the hold storage number notification commands. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure holding storage and the second special figure holding storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

FIG. 173-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 168 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 173-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 006SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 006SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 006SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 173-8 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 006SGS150a). In this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 10000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , In the process of step 006SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 173-9 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 006SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be selected. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability change B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability change C" corresponding to probability change jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 006SGS155, or when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 006SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 006SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 006SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 173-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 168 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 173-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination in step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state or the time saving state (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 006SGS168; Y). Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. The reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified by reading the above, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 006SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation or the like is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 006SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is "missing".

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands used at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol are set (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 006SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 167 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 173-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 168 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 006SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 006SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is increased. When is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), the time saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, and then the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 173-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 168 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 006SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 006SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving count counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), by executing step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 006SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control CPU 120 will be described. 173-16 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 172. The effect control CPU 120 has a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) described above is executed in the effect control process process. ) Is executed, and any of the processes of step S170 to step S175 is executed.

As the background image change processing, for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image at the start timing of variable display (the timing when the effect control process process is executed while the value of the effect control process flag is set to 1). The change of the background image displayed on the device 5 may be determined at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%), and the image display device 5 may start displaying a new background image according to the determination. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the effect corresponding to the variable display are executed in the state where any one of the plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5. There is.

When the game state changes in the background image change process (for example, from the normal state to the big hit game state, from the big hit game state to the probable change state or the time saving state, from the probable change state or the time saving state to the big hit state or the normal state). When the state is changed), the background image corresponding to the game state of the change destination may be displayed on the image display device 5.

FIG. 173-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the effect processing during variable display of the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 is a process timer according to the process table selected by the effect control CPU 120 according to the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process, and the effect control CPU 120 is in the variable display start setting process. The respective values of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer are set to -1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control status for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the contents of the process data set next (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) is according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS921; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display control unit 123 on the next display screen of the left middle right decorative symbol (display switching of the previous decorative symbol). The image data (the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the time point) is created (step 006SGS922). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a variable display of a fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927. Further, it is determined whether or not the display image processing flag described later is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS926, and if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the content of the process data being executed is confirmed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the super reach into the reach effect (step 006SGS925). If it is not the development suggestion start timing for the reach production of the super reach (step 006SGS925; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS927, and if it is the development suggestion start timing for the super reach reach production (step 006SGS925; Y), the step 006SGS926 is performed. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the effect control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacement) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to perform a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and step 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the image display device 5 displays a background image, a character image, a decorative pattern, and the like in the variation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 173-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 006SG is positioned in advance so as to be displayed in a part of the background image and the display area. Is the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, the second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in the feature unit 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the left-right width direction and the vertical width direction than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background is in the display area of the image display device 5. The central part of the image in the horizontal width direction is displayed. That is, in the feature unit 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are the vertical width dimension and the horizontal width than the display area of the image display device 5. It is an area for drawing and arranging an image having a long dimension, and in the display area of the image display device 5, only a portion of the image corresponding to the display area is displayed.

In this feature unit 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area. The present invention is not limited to this, and the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are vertically wider than the display area of the image display device 5. While the area for drawing and arranging an image having long dimensions and left-right width dimensions is used, the display image creation area is an image having the same vertical width dimension and left-right width dimension as the display area of the image display device 5. May be used as an image for drawing and arranging. In this case, of the images (background images) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is arranged in the display image creation area to create an image. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is out of the timer (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer is out of the timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

FIG. 173-18 is a flowchart showing the display image processing process (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 173-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). When the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942). When the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), the displacement image data for successful development to the super reach effect (for notification of execution of the super reach effect) is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The image data for displacement in the feature unit 006SG includes an image to be displaced (in the case of the feature unit 006SG, an image in which an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed). This is data in which displacement images for application to (images arranged in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in order in chronological order.

Further, when the variable display during execution is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the effect control CPU 120 is for failure to develop into a super reach effect (for non-execution notification of the super reach effect). As the displacement image data, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A or the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In this feature unit 006SG, there are two types of image data for displacement for failure of development to super reach effect: displacement image data of A for failure of development of super reach effect and displacement image data of B for failure of development of super reach effect. Although the embodiment in which the displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for failure to develop into a super reach effect is 3. It may be one or more.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). When the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), when the selection of the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is determined (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data of the super reach effect development failure B is selected and the step 006SGS948 is selected. Proceed to (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

When the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes the displacement image drawing process. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 173-5 in the displacement image creation area. A displacement target image may be created by compositing (superimposing), and a process of creating a displacement image may be executed by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether or not the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether or not the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

When the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process is performed. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 006SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 173-20 to 173-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 173-20 (A) and 173-20 (B), in the feature unit 006SG, the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. .. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state), the character image and the numerical image are combined as a decorative pattern for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173-20 (B), when the gaming state is the time saving state (low accuracy low base state or high accuracy high base state), the decoration for the time saving state of only the numerical image is used as the decorative pattern. The design is displayed.

Then, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 (A) and 173-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging due to the combination of reach. After that, the decorative symbols with different numerical values from the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging as the decorative symbols inside. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 173-21 (C), among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative pattern. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative pattern in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative pattern on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 (C) to 173-21 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol (indicated as "development!" Shown in FIGS. 173-21 (C) to 173-21 (E)) that informs the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward. The symbol) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

The development notification symbol in the feature unit 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 173-21 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 173-21 (D). Eyes, the third stage shown in FIG. 173-21 (E), and the number increases as the stage progresses.

Then, when the third stage slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the center part of the display area of the image display device 5 (the central part of the middle area 006SG005C) is reached. Development notification The movement of the symbol is completed, and the development of the super reach to reach production is notified.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, first, as shown in FIGS. 173-22 (A) and 173-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging due to the combination of reach. After that, the decorative symbols with different numerical values from the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging as the decorative symbols inside. Next, the development suggestion effect is executed. As a development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 173-22 (C), among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L including the left decorative pattern. , The middle area 006SG005C including the decorative pattern in the middle, and the right area 006SG005R including the decorative pattern on the right. Then, as shown in FIGS. 173-22 (C) to 173-22 (E), the images displayed in the middle region 006SG005C (decorative patterns and background images included in the middle region 006SG005C) are gradually displayed. A development notification symbol for notifying the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward is displayed by moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (decorative pattern and background image on the left) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R according to the downward slide movement of the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the left decorative pattern and the background image). The decorative pattern on the right and the background image) slide upward.

The slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in FIG. 173-22 (C) and the second step shown in FIG. 173-22 (D). It increases with the eyes and stages.

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first-step slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second-step slide movement is performed. After the execution, as shown in FIG. 173-22 (E), the development suggestion effect is completed without the third stage slide movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 is FIG. 173. It returns to the state shown in -22 (B), and stops at a combination indicating that the decorative symbol and the small symbol are out of alignment.

As shown in FIGS. 173-21 (C) to 173-21 (E), the slide movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R in the feature unit 006SG. Illustrates a mode in which the number increases as the stage progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and slides of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R. The amount of movement may decrease as the stage progresses, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

Further, in the present feature unit 006SG, as a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is illustrated as a form in which each image can be moved and displayed in up to three stages. The number of steps for sliding and moving each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 (C) to 173-21 (E), in the feature unit 006SG, the slide direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. The present invention is not limited to this, and the slide direction of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is the middle region 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed in.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state). The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be displaced for the development suggestion effect when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state). ..

As a development suggestion effect in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 173-23 (A) to 173-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including the small symbol are drawn, and the decorative symbol including the development notification symbol described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer is formed. 3 A background image is drawn in the image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to be displayed on the image display device 5. Images are being created.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 and 173-22, the first interface image 006SG005I is used in both the case of the variable display of the normal reach variation pattern and the case of the variable display of the super reach variation pattern. Since the second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, it is not subject to displacement. For this reason, the decorative design moves toward the upper side or the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, so that the visibility from the player is lowered, while the first interface image 006SG005I is the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the lower part of the display area is maintained at the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is deteriorated. There is no.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 and 173-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image of is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Image data is used. Here, as described above, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is set to have a higher ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach. The ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion effect.

Further, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern. Since the decorative design of No. slides and moves without being divided, including the character and the number, it is prevented that the development suggestion production is less interesting due to the division of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Only one or two of the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 006SG, the image data for displaying the decorative pattern and the background image and the displacement image data for shifting the display position of the decorative pattern and the background image are obtained. Specific effects that displace the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in feature unit 006SG, reach suggestion effect in variant 006SG-1, revival effect in variant 006SG-2, variant 006SG- Since it is possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect in 3, the promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6), these specific effects are executed using dedicated data. The amount of data to be stored in the CGROM 205 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, since the feature unit 006SG can display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally, a specific effect is produced depending on the case where each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in the feature unit 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced only by using the data of the displacement image, so that the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be suppressed. In the feature unit 006SG, as game-related information, the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D capable of specifying the first special figure reserved storage number and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U capable of specifying the second special figure reserved storage number. , And a mode in which a small symbol whose display area is smaller than that of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is shortened as the game-related information. A fourth that can identify that a launch promotion display or a variable display that urges the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or the gate 41 by being in a state or a probable change state is being executed. A design or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area having the highest image display priority, that is, the feature unit 006SG. Since it is a non-target image of the image displacement in the development suggestion effect in, the display position does not shift together with the image of the left region 006SG005L, the image of the right region 006SG005R, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C, which is the target of the displacement, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in visually recognizing game-related information such as the number of reserved special figures and the variable display of small symbols when the effect is executed.

Further, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right region 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion effect. Since the display position of the two-interface image 006SG005J itself does not shift, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the second interface image 006SG005J without discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R during the development suggestion production, the player can see the player. The first special figure reserved storage number in the first interface image 006SG005I is accurately displayed without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the hold storage display area 006SG005D and the second hold storage display area 006SG005U that identifiablely displays the number of hold storages in the second special figure.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 and 173-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the portion, the visibility is lowered, so that the effect of the development suggestion effect can be improved. Further, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right portion of the display area of the image display device 5 when the development suggestion effect is executed, so that the visibility does not deteriorate. The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbol even during the execution of the development suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173-21, in the development suggestion effect of the feature unit 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R gradually increases. While improving the effect of the development suggestion effect, the amount of movement of the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R at each stage can be emphasized, so that the effect is further improved. can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 and 173-22, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid to move to the third stage. While the data for the displacement image is used, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the displacement image for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R to the first stage or the second stage. Because the data for development is used, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the image data for displacement used in the development suggestion effect, so that the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the production interest of the development suggestion production.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-21 and 173-22, when the image for the displacement image in which the images of the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R are slid to the third stage is used, and the left region 006SG005L, the middle. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage, the parts where the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common. When using the displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide and move to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the second stage. When using the slide-moving displacement image data, the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R have the same part where the images slide and move up to the second stage, so the left region 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. Since the player can pay attention to the process such as the number of stages in which the images of the middle area 006SG005C and the right area 006SG005R slide and move, the effect of the development suggestion can be further improved.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 173-24 and 173-25 as the modified example 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reach during the variable display. The reach suggestion effect may be feasible.

The production mode of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 173-24 and 173-25. First, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, as shown in FIGS. 173-24 (A) to 173-24 (C), the left decoration is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decoration symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the symbol, and the decorative symbol on the left stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 173-24 (D) to 173-24 (F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol acts on the right. The decorative pattern stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is distorted and displayed.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the non-reach fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 173-25 (A) to 173-25 (C), the left decorative symbol is at the timing immediately before the stop of the left decorative symbol. The action image of the character or the like acts on the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the left is distorted and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 173-25 (D) to 173-25 (F), the action image of the character or the like acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the stop of the right decorative symbol, but the right The number of symbols that do not match the reach as decorative symbols of is stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and reaches. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the decorative pattern on the right is displayed without distortion.

As a reach suggestion effect in the present modification 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 173-26 (A) to 173-26 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. The first interface image 006SG005I including the display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including the small symbol are drawn, the action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. A displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In the present modification 006SG-1, a mode in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in a variable display of fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach suggestion effect may not be executed in a part of the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, as a reach suggestion effect, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion effect in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach, the case where the action image acts on the decorative symbol only once (only acts on the decorative symbol on the left) may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern is illustrated as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach suggestion effects are used. The action image of the above may be displayed, and the reach ratio may be different depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, in the case where the reach is not achieved even though the action image of the character or the like acts as the reach suggestion effect, the acted decorative pattern or the background image in which the display area overlaps with the decorative symbol is displayed. Although a form in which a part is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the action image is always applied regardless of whether or not the reach is achieved. It is also possible to distort a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern on which the above acts and the decorative pattern and the display area overlap.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts and a part of the background image in which the decorative pattern and the display area overlap are distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern on which the action image acts overlaps with the decorative pattern and the display area. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature unit 213SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 173-27 and 173-28 as a modified example 006SG-2, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed by a combination of detachment is displayed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that changes into a combination of big hits.

The production mode of the revival effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 173-27 and 173-28. First, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 173-27 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of reach as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern reaches. It is oscillated by the combination of off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173-27 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative pattern inside, and a plurality of decorative patterns inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is displayed separately in the fragments of. Then, as shown in FIG. 173-27 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 173-27 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173-27 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 173-27 (C) as the third stage crack, and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image is finally displayed in which fragments of the decorative pattern inside are scattered so as to diffuse, and then a new decorative pattern indicating that the decorative pattern inside is a big hit is displayed. Variable display stops.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of order, as shown in FIG. 173-28 (A), after it is suggested that the variable display result is out of order as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. It is oscillated by the combination of reach off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 173-28 (B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is overlapped and displayed on the decorative pattern inside, and a plurality of decorative patterns inside are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. It is displayed separately in the fragments of. Then, as shown in FIG. 173-28 (C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed as the second stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 173-28 (B), and each fragment is displayed as an image. It moves so as to diffuse from the central portion of the device 5 in different directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173-28 (D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 173-28 (C) as the third stage crack, and each fragment is further displayed. Move to spread.

However, in the variable display in which the variable display result is out of alignment, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, The revival effect is completed without executing the crack in the fourth stage, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 173-28 (A), and the decorative symbol and the small symbol are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

As a revival effect in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 173-29 (A) to 173-29 (F), the first hold storage display is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. The first interface image 006SG005I including the area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and the crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to obtain the displacement image (middle). The decorative pattern of is divided into a plurality of fragments, and each fragment is displayed so as to be diffused).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in the present modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside is gradually expanded as a revival effect, that is, in the revival effect, the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern to the display area of the image display device 5. Is gradually increased, so that the player can be more effectively focused on the revival effect by gradually expanding the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern.

In the present modification 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is duplicated and displayed on the decorative pattern inside is illustrated as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit may be different depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 173-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a big hit, blue cracks are performed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival effect is executed, and the red crack effect is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In the present modification 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the crack effect image 006SG005H is not limited to this. Three or more colors may be provided.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode in which the revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The revival effect may be executed when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Further, in the present modification 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 173-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection effect, and the number of these fragments is maintained according to the progress of the resurrection effect. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the embodiment in which these fragments are moved stepwise from the central portion to the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5. The plurality of constituent fragments may be gradually increased according to the progress of the resurrection effect. By doing so, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the revival effect by the visual effect that the number of fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside increases as the revival effect progresses.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 173-31 as a modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, variable display is executed in the hold storage with a fluctuation pattern of super reach. It is also possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that the variable display in which the variable display result is a big hit is executed from the variable display multiple times before.

The production mode of the look-ahead notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 173-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (A) and 173-31 (B), in a state where a plurality of reserved memories exist, the variable display during execution is stopped by a combination of the decorative symbols. Then, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (C) and 173-31 (D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect crossing the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. The image 006SG005S is displayed in duplicate with respect to the decorative pattern and the background image. Then, of the display area displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the lower lower area 006SG005B including a part of the decorative pattern and the background image with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a boundary and the rest. It is divided into an upper upper area 006SG005T including a decorative pattern and a background image. That is, the boundary portion between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (D) to 173-31 (E), the lower region 006SG005B is on the left side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T is on the right side along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide and move toward at the same time. Then, the lower region 006SG005B that slides to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides downward, and the upper region 006SG005T that slides to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S slides upward. .. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed so as to follow both the boundary portion on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary portion on the upper region 006SG005T side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (E) and 173-31 (F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B is slid downward and the upper area 006SG005T is slid upward. Starts displaying a black image. The display area of the black image expands according to the progress of the downward slide movement of the lower region 006SG005B and the upward slide movement of the upper region 006SG005T, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T move out of the display area. By completing the movement, only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed in the display area, which is a so-called blackout state.

After that, when the blackout ends, the display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. The pre-reading notice effect is repeatedly executed until the start of the variable display of the external pre-reading target.

As a look-ahead notice effect in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 173-32 (A) to 173-32 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-3, there is a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing an image further below. Have been placed. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed by the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in the present modification 006SG-3, in the look-ahead notice effect as the specific effect in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (C) and 173-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T and the lower part are shown. A decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left side, respectively, at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. Since the disconnection effect image 006SG005S is displayed, the player can more effectively recognize the movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B as the look-ahead notice effect to the left and right sides. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 173-32, since the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image having a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or the background image, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower part are drawn. Even if the display position of the area 006SG005B is displaced, the display position of the cut effect image 006SG005S is not displaced. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (D) and 173-31 (E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region are further moved. By moving the boundary portion with 006SG005B toward the upper side and the lower side, respectively, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In particular, as a look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (D) and 173-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left side, but the upper region 006SG005T. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005B and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary portion further enhances the effect of the look-ahead notice effect. Can be done.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving direction of the boundary portion between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It suffices if it is different from either one.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cut effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a look-ahead notice effect, and the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T divided along the cut effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and a variable display of the look-ahead target is displayed depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result in is a big hit may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 173-33, three kinds of colors of blue, green, and red are provided as display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the look-ahead target is a big hit, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is used. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the look-ahead target is out of alignment, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 10%. Just do it.

By doing so, the player can pay attention to the display color of the disconnection effect image 006SG005S displayed during the look-ahead notice effect, so that the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further enhanced.

In the present modification 006SG-3, a form in which three kinds of colors of blue, green, and red are provided as display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect is not limited thereto. The display color of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Further, the ratio of the variable display result of the look-ahead target to be a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the display number of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and other aspects other than the color. ..

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two regions along the cutting effect image 006SG005S has been exemplified. The pre-reading notice effect is not limited, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas. In this case, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect may be improved by changing the slide movement direction of each area.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as a look-ahead notice effect, a mode in which the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to this. The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the left side. It is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different from each other, so that the pre-reading notice effect is produced. It can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated.

In this modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the image displayed in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side are different. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in the image displayed in the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and in the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side. At least a part of the image may be common. By doing so, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the pre-reading notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 173-31 (C) and 173-31 (D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. The image displayed over the 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed over the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed over the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the look-ahead notice effect. It is not necessary that a part of the image is displayed as an image displayed over the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the production of the look-ahead notice production.

In this modification 006SG-3, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect (in FIG. 173-31 (D), the upper region 006SG005T is moved to the right side and the lower region 006SG005B is moved. The amount of movement (displacement) between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same when the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. 173-31 (E). Is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of movement (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B when the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead notice effect. ) May be different. In this way, by making the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in the opposite directions as the look-ahead notice effect different, different, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect can be further improved.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 173-33, a mode in which the ratio of the variable display result of the look-ahead target to be a big hit is different depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 173-34 as a modification 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed for each variable display execution. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the look-ahead target becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) may be different depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the super reach to the reach effect is exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIG. 173-35 as a modification example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a non-probability change jackpot or a two-round probability change with a small number of rounds is performed during the variable display. A combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed in the same state as the combination that indicates the jackpot, and finally stopped. You may execute a promotion effect (also called a re-lottery effect) to notify the jackpot type.

The production mode of the promotion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 173-35. First, after notifying that the variable display result is a big hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIG. 173-35 (A), after the end of these reach effects, the decorative design is changed to a non-probable big hit or a two-round probability change. It is displayed as a combination indicating a jackpot type having a relatively low advantage for a player such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 173-35 (A), a combination of even "2" indicating a non-probability variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 173-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are used as promotion effects, such as a 2-round probability variation jackpot, a 5-round probability variation jackpot, and a 10-round probability variation jackpot. Variable display is performed at a constant speed while including combinations of other jackpot types of decorative symbols.

During the execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 173-35 (C) and 173-35 (D), the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 faces to the left in two steps. And distort.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type (see FIG. 173-35 (A)) indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first. In some cases, after the distortion of the first stage or the second stage of the promotion effect, the decorative symbol stops at the combination of the jackpot type (the combination of the probability variation jackpot in the example shown in FIG. 173-35 (E)). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of the decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbol is the decorative symbol after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at the combination of jackpot types (the combination of non-probability variable jackpots in the example shown in FIG. 173-35 (F)).

In this modification 006SG-5, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types is controlled to whether or not the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends, and to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to those with different variable display times and those with different numbers of rounds in big hit games.

As a promotion effect in the present modification 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 173-36 (A) to 173-36 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first hold storage display. A first interface image 006SG005I including an area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small symbol are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by superimposing the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement target is created. By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the central portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is created.

The display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modification 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the horizontal width direction and the vertical width direction, like the feature unit 006SG. (See FIG. 173-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 173-37, the dimensions of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction are images. It may be the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. 173-38 (A) to 173-38 (C), the promotion effect is in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5. When the central portion is distorted toward the left side, an image non-display portion in which no image is displayed is formed in the right portion of the display area.

Therefore, when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 173-37, FIG. 173 As shown in −39 (A) to FIG. 173-39 (D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn. By enlarging the arranged background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image is moved out of the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. By doing so, by applying the displacement image to the image to be displaced, even if the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, the right portion of the image display device 5 Since the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed due to the enlargement, the image display device 5 is inappropriate because the above-mentioned image non-display portion is formed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the display will be displayed.

In addition, in FIG. 173-39, when the central portion in the vertical direction in the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect, no image is displayed on the right portion of the display area. Although the embodiment in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged is illustrated in order to prevent the formation of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image non-display portion is formed. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the displacement image is displayed on the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left-right width dimension is longer than the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of creating an image for promotion effect by applying it, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied among the displacement target images is the display of the image display device 5. It is not necessary to displace only the part corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the left-right width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. By enlarging the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, the image non-display portion is formed during the promotion effect. The embodiment is illustrated to prevent the image from being drawn, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative pattern drawn / arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are drawn / arranged. The enlargement of the background image may be performed stepwise according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, the decorative pattern and the background image are suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5, so that a sense of discomfort can be reduced. Therefore, the display area of the image display device 5 can be displayed while maintaining the effect of the promotion effect. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as the image non-display portion being displayed on the image display device 5.

Further, the feature unit 006SG exemplifies a mode in which a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of the reach effect of the super reach can be executed during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is in progress. In, it is possible to execute a pseudo-ream effect including a temporary stop of a decorative symbol and a revariable display, and the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state (big hit expectation) may be different according to the number of executions of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In particular, in the variable display for executing such a pseudo-continuous effect, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbol, or a temporary stop suggestion effect when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute a temporary stop notification effect for notifying the temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a form in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion is performed in advance in the CGROM 205. An image having a size larger than the display area of the image display device 5 as an image for effect (at least the left-right width dimension is longer than the left-right width dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 in the case of this modification 006SG-5) is stored. However, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-5, when the promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged so that the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. An example is an example of a mode in which an image non-display portion is prevented from being formed during the execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part thereof, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the promotion effect is executed. In this case, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of the present modification 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. An image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) may be arranged adjacent to the display image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the displayed image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other over the display area and the non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image non-display portion is replaced. Therefore, a part of the non-display image will be displayed.

The feature unit 006SG exemplifies a development suggestion effect suggesting the development of super reach into a reach effect as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 173-40 to 173-42 as a modification 006SG-6, as the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, these temporary stop suggestion effect and temporary stop notification effect are used. You may do it.

The production mode of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 173-40. First, as shown in FIG. 173-40 (A), when a certain period of time elapses from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and reach. After that, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative symbol, moves from the upper side to the lower side. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ripple effect image 006SG005P so as to converge from the peripheral portion of the display area toward the central portion of the display area, and at the same time, the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background image) are displayed distorted.

When the variable display is a variable display for executing a pseudo-ream effect (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and as shown in FIG. 173-40 (B). , The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporary stop and the pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in which the pseudo-ream effect is not executed (variable display in which the pseudo-ream symbol does not temporarily stop), the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as it is, as shown in FIG. 173-40 (C). The image is moved to the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to be hidden, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is out of alignment is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In the present modification 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 173-40, a form suggesting that the decorative pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5 is provided. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. The ratio at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different accordingly.

For example, in FIG. 173-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (doublely displayed) as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 173-41, a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect. Is provided, and the rate at which the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped may be different depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect.

In this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the decorative symbol, that is, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as a part of the variable display even in a period other than the pseudo-ream effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol different from the decorative symbol and may be a special symbol displayed only during the pseudo-continuous production.

As shown in FIGS. 173-42 (A) and 173-42 (B), the temporary stop notification effect is the ripple effect image 006SG005P after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The image is displayed so as to diffuse from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the peripheral edge of the display area, and the surrounding image (left and right decorative patterns and background image) of the ripple effect image 006SG005P is distorted. Is displayed.

As the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 173-43 (A) to 173-43 (F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is used. The first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved storage display area 006SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and the ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. It is drawn, and a decorative pattern including a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Further, in the displacement image creation area, the displacement target image is created by the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the displacement image (ripple) is applied to the displacement target image. The effect image 006SG005P creates a distorted decorative pattern and a background image).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

Further, in the feature unit 006GS, a mode of displaying an effect image by using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only a stereoscopic image is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 006SG-. As shown in FIGS. 173-44 and 173-45 as FIG. 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

The modified example 006SG-7 will be described below. In the above-mentioned feature unit 006SG and the modified example, a display device such as an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a plan view image (2D image) is used as the image display device 5. However, in the present modification 006SG-7, as shown in FIG. 173-44, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5 in which the player can visually recognize the stereoscopic image with the naked eye by the paralux barrier method. The feature is that by using ‘’, it is possible to display a stereoscopic image (3D image) in addition to a planar view image (2D image) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 173-44, the naked-eye liquid crystal image display device 5'of this modification 006SG-7 is a liquid crystal image (video) composed of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image). The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying the image, the backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. It has a structure having a 006SG900 and a liquid crystal panel for a parallax barrier 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

In the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the player's left eye visually recognizes the right-eye image (R image) displayed in a vertically long strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the player's right eye displays the left-eye image (L image). It has a vertical striped black portion that serves as a shutter for preventing the player from visually recognizing, and a transparent portion that enables the player's right eye to visually recognize the image for the right eye and the player's left eye to visually recognize the image for the left eye. A liquid crystal with relatively high light transparency that enables a parallax barrier image display state for displaying a parallax barrier image and a transmissive state in which all pixels are transparent parts without vertical striped black parts. It is said to be a panel.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( A plan view image (2D image) can also be displayed by setting the display to full transparency.

That is, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5'which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7 is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to the non-stereoscopic image (2D image). It is possible to display a stereoscopic image with the naked eye.

The stereoscopic image composed of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the above-mentioned layers in the same manner as the plan view image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel. The disparity barrier image displayed on the 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the disparity barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', another effect is stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may be made feasible by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIGS. 173-45 (A) to 173-45 (D), during the variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5'moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. The development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward are displayed, can be executed, and the execution period of the development suggestion effect is long. As a non-overlapping notice effect, a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is executed, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display notice effect.

That is, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the image of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward, which are the displacement specific images, are displayed. In this case, only the stereoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and the image of the right region 006SG005R moved upward and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moved downward as described above, which are displacement specific images, are displayed, the display is non-stereoscopic. By making it a planar image (2D image) which is an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to the stereoscopic image, and the interest of the production is lowered. Can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effect of displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), the images of the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R moved upward, which are the displacement specific images, and the middle region 006SG005C moved downward. Since the execution period is different from the development suggestion effect, which is a specific effect in which the image of is displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same production, the stereoscopic image (3D) is displayed during the display of the displacement specific image. To prevent the image) from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can specify that the displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is based on the data. The display of may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, a predetermined period before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image is completed. Even during the period, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5'using a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging type naked-eye stereoscopic image display device other than the parallax barrier method.

In the present modification 006SG0-7, a mode in which the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stereoscopic view is also performed in the development suggestion effect. A case may be provided in which an image (3D image) is displayed. When displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) even in the exhibition suggestion effect, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) is drawn, and the planar view image (2D image) is drawn. It may be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be arranged. By doing so, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is preferably displayed in the development suggestion effect. can do.

Further, in the present modification 006SG-7, as an effect of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display advance notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit is different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Although the form that can be executed in a period is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the introduction effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is performed in the period before the development suggestion effect (specific effect). A stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) is executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be performed. The production effect of can be further improved. Furthermore, a plurality of production modes of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) are provided, and the practice mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) can be set according to which effect mode the introduction effect is executed. It may be different.

Further, in the introduction effect, the movable body 32 is operated, and the operation of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the effect of the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect). May be improved.

Further, the feature unit 006SG illustrates a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 173-46 as a modification 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (first interface image 006SG005I or second interface in the feature unit 006SG) is used. (Corresponding to image 006SG005J), the payout display of medals, the display of the number of remaining games of AT (assist time), the medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 together with the effect image, and these game-related information is displayed. It may be a non-target image of displacement.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, as a specific effect of the present invention, an effect of changing or distorting (distorting) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a specific effect, a change or distortion of the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be repeatedly executed.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention. As these specific effects, a plurality of effects may be executed. In the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (character and number) is not divided, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into a plurality of fragments or display areas, such as a revival effect or a look-ahead notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of a specific effect due to the fact that the decorative pattern including the character and the number is not divided in the normal state, and conversely, in the time saving state, the decorative pattern containing only the number is displayed. By dividing, the effect of a specific effect can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, an embodiment in which the decorative design is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state and the decorative design is composed only of numbers in the time saving state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the decorative symbol may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variable pattern such as the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach. For example, in the variable display of Super Reach, the variable display of the decorative symbol composed of characters and numbers is executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and the decorative symbol composed of only the numbers is executed in the period after the reach. The variable display of is performed. Further, in the period after the reach, as the specific effect in the present invention, it is sufficient to enable the effect of dividing the decorative pattern such as the revival effect.

Further, in the feature unit 006SG and each modification, an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction is displayed as a displacement specific image on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of a specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement / reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

Further, in the feature unit 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 173-3 and 173-4, in the displacement target image, the R value and the G value of the displacement target image correspond to the R value and the G value of the displacement image from the position corresponding to the pixel A. An embodiment in which a displacement image is generated in a replacement method in which a pixel X is specified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) at a position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, for example, in the displacement target image, the displacement image is moved by a method (movement method) in which the pixel X at the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image is moved to the position corresponding to the R value and the G value of the pixel A. It may be generated. In the replacement method, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the region close to the boundary portion to the displacement image considering the width of the boundary portion of the region having a different movement direction as in the modified example 006SG-3. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, since it is not necessary to edit these, the load of creating an image can be reduced, and when an effect image or the like is placed at the boundary, the boundary where the effect image is placed is set. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the load of creating images including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative pattern display area, 6A prize ball device, 6B variable prize ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp 10 General winning opening, 11 Main board, 12 Production control board, 13 Audio control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special figure LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start Mouth switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 pass gate, 50 4th symbol unit, 81, 82,83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
It is equipped with a group effect execution means for executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group.
The image display period in the group effect includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period.
The first display period is a period from the start of the display of the first character in the group effect to the new display of the character and the first end of the display of any of the characters.
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period in which a new display of the character is performed and the display of the displayed character is terminated.
The third display period is a period in which the display of the displayed character continues without a new display of the character.
In the first display period, from the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed, a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and second. In the second situation where a part of the displayed character is displayed,
Moreover,
A display means that has a display area capable of displaying an image and can display a display image of game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area.
A storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information, and a storage means.
An image processing means having a plurality of display layers on which an image based on the image data can be arranged and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged on the plurality of display layers. ,
An effect executing means capable of executing an effect of displaying the specific image in the display area,
Equipped with
The storage means can store display position displacement information for shifting a display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position to a second position different from the first position.
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images